2009 Nissan Altima

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSANowners. This vehicle is delivered to you withconfidence. It was produced using the latesttechniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-stand the operation and maintenance of yourvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through thismanual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletexplains details about the warranties cov-ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Serviceand Maintenance Guide” explains detailsabout maintaining and servicing your ve-hicle. Additionally, a separate CustomerCare/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’s lemonlaw.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehiclebest. When you require any service or have anyquestions, they will be glad to assist you with theextensive resources available to them.

Before driving your vehicle, please read thisOwner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-iarity with controls and maintenance require-ments, assisting you in the safe operation of yourvehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and comfortable tripfor you and your passengers!

● NEVER drive under the influence ofalcohol or drugs.

● ALWAYS observe posted speed limitsand never drive too fast for conditions.

● ALWAYS give your full attention to drivingand avoid using vehicle features or takingother actions that could distract you.

● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-priate child restraint systems. Preteenchildren should be seated in the rear seat.

● ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features toall occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manualfor important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect itsperformance, safety or durability, andmay even violate governmentalregulations. In addition, damage or per-formance problems resulting from modi-fications may not be covered underNISSAN warranties.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Z REVIEW COPY—2009 Altima (alt)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)06/14/08—debbie X

This manual includes information for all optionsavailable on this model. Therefore, you may findsome information that does not apply to yourvehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations inthis manual are those in effect at the time ofprinting. NISSAN reserves the right to changespecifications or design without notice and with-out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual. Theyare used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce therisk, the procedures must be followedprecisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moder-ate personal injury or damage to your ve-hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-tion, it means the arrow points to the front of thevehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to theseindicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to thesecall attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components containor emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth de-fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATEADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-ies, may contain perchlorate material. Thefollowing advisory is provided: “PerchlorateMaterial – special handling may apply, Seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL


BLUETOOTHt is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.,U.S.A. and licensed toVisteon and XanaviInformaticsCorporation.

XM Radio requiressubscription, sold sepa-rately after first 90days. Not available inAlaska or Hawaii. Formore information, visitwww.xmradio.com.

© 2008 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted in any form, or by anymeans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,recording or otherwise, without the prior writtenpermission of Nissan North America, Inc.


NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer areour primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSANdealer cannot assist you with or you would like toprovide NISSAN directly with comments orquestions, please contact the NISSAN Con-sumer Affairs Department using our toll-freenumber:

For U.S. customers1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for thefollowing information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to thetop of the instrument panel on the driver’sside)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customersNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM


Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-11

Z REVIEW COPY—2009 Altima (alt)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)07/01/08—pattie X

1. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-25)2. Rear seat belts (P. 1-13)3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-42)4. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-42)5. Front-seat Active Head Restraints

(P. 1-11, P. 1-12)6. Front seat belts (P. 1-13)7. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P. 1-42)8. Seats (P. 1-2)9. Occupant classification sensor

(pattern sensor) (P. 1-50)10. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-56)11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-23)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0100

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents


Coupe

1. Power windows (P. 2-44)2. Windshield (P. 8-20)3. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-27)4. Engine hood (P. 3-23)5. Tie down/towing hooks (if so equipped)

(P. 6-13)6. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-33)7. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-29)8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)9. Tire pressure (P. 8-34)10. Flat tire (P. 6-2)11. Tire chains (P. 8-42)12. Mirrors (P. 3-28)13. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key ™

(if so equipped) , keys (P. 3-4, 3-2, 3-2)

LII0114

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3


Sedan

1. Power windows (P. 2-44)2. Windshield (P. 8-20)3. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-27)4. Engine hood (P. 3-23)5. Tie down/towing hooks (if so equipped)

(P. 6-13)6. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-33)7. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-29)8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)9. Tire pressure (P. 8-34)10. Flat tire (P. 6-2)11. Tire chains (P. 8-42)12. Mirrors (P. 3-28)13. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key ™

(if so equipped), keys (P. 3-4, 3-2, 3-2)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0094



Coupe

1. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-28)2. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-24)3. Trunk lid (P. 3-23)4. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)5. Opener operation (if so equipped)

(P. 3-23)6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-25, P. 9-3)8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25)

WII0125

EXTERIOR REAR



Sedan

1. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-28)2. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-24)3. Trunk lid (P. 3-23)4. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)5. Opener operation (if so equipped)

(P. 3-23)6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-25, P. 9-3)8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25)9. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-6)

LII0095



1. Interior trunk access (P. 1-9)2. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-46)3. Sun visors (P. 3-27)4. Interior lights, illuminated entry (P. 2-48)5. HomeLinkT (if so equipped) (P. 2-51)6. Automatic anti-glare inside mirror

(if so equipped) (P. 3-28)7. Glove box (P. 2-41)8. Front cup holders (P. 2-40)9. Front console (P. 2-41)10. Front seat (P. 1-2)11. Rear seat (P. 1-9)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0126

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT



1. Vents (P. 4-10)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-29)3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped)/BluetoothT hands-freephone system (if so equipped)(P. 4-44, P. 4-46, P. 4-61)

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-42, P. 2-34)6. Cruise control main/set switch

(P. 5-19)7. Windshield wiper/washer switch

(P. 2-27)

8. Ignition switch (P. 5-7)9. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-33)10. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-51)11. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-42)12. Glove box (P. 2-41)13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2)14. Heater and air conditioner (manual or

automatic) (P. 4-11, P. 4-18)15. Shift selector (P. 5-11)16. Audio system controls (if so equipped)/

Storage (if so equipped) (P. 4-21)17. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls

(P. 3-27)18. Vehicle information display controls

(P. 2-17)19. Hood release (P. 3-23)20. Traction Control System (TCS) OFF

switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-25)Trunk opener (P. 3-23)Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch (if so equipped) (P. 2-35)Intelligent Key port (P. 5-7)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation SystemOwner’s Manual.

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WIC1258

INSTRUMENT PANEL



QR25DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-14, 8-14)4. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)5. Fuse block (P. 8-22)6. Battery (P. 8-15)7. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)10. Drive belt location (P. 8-17)11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-15)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LDI0553

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS



VQ35DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid

reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-14, 8-14)4. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)5. Fuse block (P. 8-22)6. Battery (P. 8-15)7. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)10. Drive belt location (P. 8-17)11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-15)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LDI0552



Warninglight

Name Page

or

Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS) warn-ing light (if soequipped)

2-11

or

Brake warning light 2-11

Charge warninglight

2-11

Continuously Vari-able Transmission(CVT) check warn-ing light (if soequipped)

2-11

Engine oil pressurewarning light

2-12

NISSAN IntelligentKey ™ warning light

2-13

Warninglight

Name Page

Low tire pressurewarning light

2-12

Master warning light 2-13

Seat belt warninglight and chime

2-13

Supplemental airbag warning light

1-57

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Continuously Vari-able Transmission(CVT) position indi-cator light

2-14

Front passenger airbag status light

2-14

High beam indicatorlight (blue)

2-14

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Malfunction Indica-tor Light (MIL)

2-14

Security indicatorlight

2-26

Slip indicator light (ifso equipped)

2-15

Traction ControlSystem off indicatorlight (if so equipped)

2-35

Turn signal/hazardindicator lights

2-16

Vehicle DynamicControl off indicatorlight (if so equipped)

2-35

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS




MEMO

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front power seat adjustment(if so equipped for driver’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Front-seat Active Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21

Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Child restraint installation using the seatbelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31

Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37Booster seat installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57


WARNING

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat properly. See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” later in thissection.

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

● The seatback should not be reclinedany more than needed for comfort. Seatbelts are most effective when the pas-senger sits well back and straight up inthe seat. If the seatback is reclined, therisk of sliding under the lap belt andbeing injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, besure not to contact any moving parts toavoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENT

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


Forward and backwardPull the center of the bar up and hold it while youslide the seat forward or backward to the desiredposition. Release the lever to lock the seat inposition.

RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever up and leanback. To bring the seatback forward, pull the leverup and lean your body forward. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section. Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped and the transmission is in P (Park) or N(Neutral) position with the parking brake fullyapplied.

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’sseat)Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjustthe seat height until the desired position isachieved.

WRS0738 WRS0739 WRS0740

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3


FRONT POWER SEATADJUSTMENT (if so equipped fordriver’s seat)

Operating tips

● The power seat motor has an auto-resetoverload protection circuit. If the motorstops during operation, wait 30 seconds,then reactivate the switch.

● Do not operate the power seat switch for along period of time when the engine is off.This will discharge the battery.

● Pull up on the upper seatback release leverto release the seatback only. Push the seat-back forward to allow for access to itemsbehind the front seat. Push the seatback tothe rear of the vehicle to return the seatbackto the upright and locked position. The up-per seatback release lever does not need tobe used.

WARNING

Before driving the vehicle, return the seat-back to an upright seating position aftermanually releasing it. Also, make sure theseat is locked in place. Failure to do somay cause the seat to move in a collisionor sudden stop. This may result in damageto the seat or personal injury.

CoupeWRS0841



CAUTION

● Do not operate the power recline switchwhen the seatback has been manuallyreleased using the upper seatback re-lease lever s1 . Doing so can damagethe seat.

● Do not pull on the upper seatback re-lease lever or the trim to return theseatback to a normal seating position.Doing so may damage the seat.

Forward and backwardMoving the switch forward or backward will slidethe seat forward or backward to the desiredposition.

RecliningMove the recline switch backward until the de-sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatbackforward again, move the switch forward andmove your body forward. The seatback will moveforward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section). Also, the seatback can be re-clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P(Park) or N (Neutral) position with the parkingbrake fully applied.

SedanWRS0751



Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’sseat)Pull the lever up or push down to adjust the angleand height of the seat cushion.

Lumbar support (if so equipped fordriver’s seat)The lumbar support feature provides lower backsupport to the driver. Push the switch (Type A)forward or backward or move the lever (Type B)up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area.

Coupe shown, Sedan similarWRS0842

Type AWRS0743

Type BWRS0843



Entry to the rear seat from outside ofthe vehicle on the front passenger side(Coupe)Pull the seat recliner lever s1 to the uppermostposition folding the seatback forward s2 , releas-ing the seat track.

Slide the entire seat forward for access to therear seat.

To return the seat to a locked position:

Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat-back and track are locked.

Operating tips:

● The seatback and track will not lock until theseatback is returned rearward.

● The seat track will not lock until it reachesthe first position memory point.

● The seatback will return to the first lockingnotch when using the seat recliner lever.

Entry to the rear seat from outside ofthe vehicle on the driver’s side usingthe upper seatback release lever(Coupe)

The use of the upper seatback release lever s1 ,on the inboard side of the passenger seat, allowsfor the driver to:

● allow passenger entry to the rear seat fromoutside of the vehicle.

● access items located behind the front pas-senger seat.

WRS0789 WRS0791



Pull the upper seatback release lever s1 to theuppermost position, folding the seatback forwards2 , releasing the seat track.

Slide the entire seat forward for access to therear seat.



Operating tips:



● The seatback will return to an upright seatingposition if the upper seatback release leveris pulled to the uppermost position.

Exiting from the rear seat on the frontpassenger side, using the lowerseatback release lever (coupe)Press on the lower seatback release lever s1until it reaches the lowermost position. Fold theseatback forward s2 , releasing the seat track.

Slide the entire seat forward for access from therear seat.



Operating tips:



● The seatback will return to an upright seatingposition if the lower seatback release lever ispushed to the uppermost position.

WRS0790



Exiting from the rear seat on thedriver’s side, using the upper seatbackrelease lever (coupe)Pull the upper seatback release lever s1 to theuppermost position, folding the seatback forwards2 , releasing the seat track.

Slide the entire seat forward to exit from the rearseat.



Operating tips:

● The seatback and track will not lock until theseat back is returned rearward.


● The seatback will return to an upright seatingposition if the upper seatback release leveris pulled to the uppermost position.

FOLDING REAR SEAT

Interior trunk access

The trunk can be accessed from the passengerside of the rear seat for loading and unloading, asshown.

WRS0791

WRS0794



1. Open the access cover on the rear parcelshelf.

2. Push down on the button on the rear parcelshelf.

3. Fold down the passenger’s side seatback.

WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seat when it is in thefold-down position. Use of these areasby passengers without proper restraintscould result in serious injury in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

● When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched posi-tion. If they are not completely secured,passengers may be injured in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with the rearseatback and trunk lid securely latchedwhen not in use, and prevent children’saccess to car keys.

To fold down the driver’s side of the rear seat,reach through the opening and pull on the straps1 located behind the seat.

The rear seats can be locked using the mechani-cal key to prevent unauthorized access. For moreinformation on keys, refer to “Keys” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of thismanual.

WRS0745



Center armrest (if so equipped)Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENTTo raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower,push and hold the lock knob and push the headrestraint down.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted prop-erly as they may provide significant pro-tection against injury in an accident. Donot remove them. Check the adjustmentafter someone else uses the seat.

Adjust the head restraint so the center is levelwith the center of your ears.

WRS0167 LRS0746 WRS0134



FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEADRESTRAINTS

WARNING

● Always adjust the head restraints prop-erly as specified in this section. Failureto do so can reduce the effectiveness ofthe Active Head Restraint.

● Active Head Restraints are designed tosupplement other safety systems. Al-ways wear seat belts. No system canprevent all injuries in any accident.

● Do not attach anything to the head re-straint stalks. Doing so could impairActive Head Restraint function.

The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-ing the force that the seatback receives from theoccupant in a rear-end collision. The movementof the head restraint helps support the occu-pant’s head by reducing its backward movementand helping absorb some of the forces that maylead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for collisionsat low to medium speeds in which it is said thatwhiplash injuries occur most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certainrear-end collisions. After the collision, the headrestraints return to their original positions.

Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints asdescribed earlier in this section.

SPA1025



PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-justed and you are sitting upright and well back inyour seat with both feet on the floor, your chancesof being injured or killed in an accident and/or theseverity of injury may be greatly reduced.NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of yourpassengers to buckle up every time you drive,even if your seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts be wornat all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS



WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat and, if appro-priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

● The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in an acci-dent. Serious injury or death can occurif the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016



WARNING

● Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never put the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck. Thebelt should be away from your face andneck, but not falling off your shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low and snug aspossible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THEWAIST. A lap belt worn too high couldincrease the risk of internal injuries inan accident.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

● Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

● Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

● Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

● If the seat belt warning light glows con-tinuously while the ignition is turnedON with all doors closed and all seatbelts fastened, it may indicate a mal-function in the system. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

● No changes should be made to the seatbelt system. For example, do not modifythe seat belt, add material, or installdevices that may change the seat beltrouting or tension. Doing so may affectthe operation of the seat belt system.Modifying or tampering with the seatbelt system may result in serious per-sonal injury.

● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-vated, it cannot be reused and must bereplaced together with the retractor.See your NISSAN dealer.

● Removal and installation of preten-sioner system components should bedone by a NISSAN dealer.

● All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any collisionby a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-mends that all seat belt assemblies inuse during a collision be replaced un-less the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue tooperate properly. Seat belt assembliesnot in use during a collision should alsobe inspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation is noted.

● All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any col-lision. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s inspection instructionsand replacement recommendations.The child restraints should be replacedif they are damaged.

SSS0014



CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in thismanual, child safety information is available frommany other sources, including doctors, teachers,government traffic safety offices, and communityorganizations. Every child is different, so be sureto learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraintsystems:

● Rear-facing child restraint

● Front-facing child restraint

● Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.Generally, infants up to about 1 year and lessthan 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facingchild restraints. Front-facing child restraints areavailable for children who outgrow rear-facingchild restraints and are at least 1 year old.Booster seats are used to help position a vehiclelap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longeruse a front-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fitthem properly. The shoulder belt maycome too close to the face or neck. Thelap belt may not fit over their small hipbones. In an accident, an improperly fit-ting seat belt could cause serious or fatalinjury. Always use appropriate childrestraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-tories require the use of approved child restraintsfor infants and small children. See “Child Re-straints” later in this section.

Also, there are other types of child restraintsavailable for larger children for additional protec-tion.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rear seat.According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because yourvehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”later in this section.

Infants

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placedin a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-mends that infants be placed in child restraintsthat comply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. You should choose a child restraintthat fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Small childrenChildren that are over one year old and weigh atleast 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward-facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for minimum and maximum weightand height recommendations. NISSAN recom-mends that small children be placed in childrestraints that comply with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. You should choose a childrestraint that fits your vehicle and always followthe manufacturer’s instructions for installationand use.

Larger childrenChildren who are too large for child restraintsshould be seated and restrained by the seat beltswhich are provided. The seat belt may not fitproperly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and



80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used toobtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in acommercially available booster seat if the shoul-der belt in the child’s seating position fits close tothe face or neck or if the lap portion of the seatbelt goes across the abdomen. The booster seatshould raise the child so that the shoulder belt isproperly positioned across the top, middle por-tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on thehips. A booster seat can only be used in seatingpositions that have a three-point type seat belt.The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat andhave a label certifying that it complies with Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the childhas grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on ornear the face and neck, use the shoulder beltwithout the booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in the cargoareas while the vehicle is moving. Thechild could be seriously injured or killed inan accident or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women useseat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug andalways position the lap belt as low as possiblearound the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulderbelt over your shoulder and across your chest.Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-dominal area. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons useseat belts. Check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat belt properly.



Fastening the seat belts1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this

section.

s2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.

● The retractor is designed to lock duringa sudden stop or on impact. A slowpulling motion permits the seat belt tomove, and allows you some freedom ofmovement in the seat.

● If the seat belt cannot be pulled fromits fully retracted position, firmly pullthe belt and release it. Then smoothlypull the belt out of the retractor.

s3 Position the lap belt portion low and snugon the hips as shown.

s4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack. Be sure theshoulder belt is routed over your shoulderand across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seatingpositions three-point seat belts have two modesof operation:

● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

Manual front seat shownWRS0738 LRS0594 LRS0595



The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modeallows the seat belt to extend and retract to allowthe driver and passengers some freedom ofmovement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat beltwhen the vehicle slows down rapidly or duringcertain impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for childrestraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat beltcannot be extended again until the seat belttongue is detached from the buckle and fullyretracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR modeafter the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-straints” later in this section for more information.

The ALR mode should be used only forchild restraint installation. During normalseat belt use by an occupant, the ALR modeshould not be activated. If it is activated, itmay cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-sion.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely se-cured in the latched position. If they arenot completely secured, passengers maybe injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

s1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button onthe buckle. The seat belt automatically re-tracts.

Checking seat belt operationSeat belt retractors are designed to lock seat beltmovement by two separate methods:

● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,check the operation as follows:

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forwardquickly. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check orif you have any questions about seat belt opera-tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

WRS0139



Shoulder belt height adjustment(Sedan, front seats)The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)To adjust, pull out the adjustment button s1 andmove the shoulder belt anchor to the desiredposition s2 , so the belt passes over the center ofthe shoulder. The belt should be away from yourface and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul-der belt anchor into position.

The shoulder belt comfort assist arm can beadjusted to the position best for you. (See “Pre-cautions on seat belt usage” earlier in this sec-tion.) To adjust, move the arm up as indicated.

WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move the shoul-der belt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in position.

● The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.Failure to do so may reduce the effec-tiveness of the entire restraint systemand increase the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident. Shoulder belt guide (Coupe)

The shoulder arm can be adjusted to allow easieraccess to the shoulder belt. The arm can also befolded down to allow rear seat passengers easieraccess.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERSIf, because of body size or driving position, it isnot possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder beltand fasten it, an extender is available which iscompatible with the installed seat belts. The ex-tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) oflength and may be used for either the driver orfront passenger seating position. See a NISSANdealer for assistance if an extender is required.

LRS0242 LRS0821



WARNING

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, madeby the same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, shouldbe used with NISSAN seat belts.

● Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary use couldresult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

● Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or a sud-den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply amild soap solution or any solution recom-mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seatbelts to dry in the shade. Do not allow theseat belts to retract until they are completelydry.

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulderbelt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

● Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wiresand anchors, work properly. If loose parts,deterioration, cuts or other damage on thewebbing is found, the entire seat belt as-sembly should be replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

ARS1098

CHILD RESTRAINTS



WARNING

● Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint can re-sult in serious injury or death.

● Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating front air bag could seriously in-jure or kill your child. A rear-facing childrestraint must only be used in the rearseat.

● NISSAN recommends that the child re-straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat. Ifyou must install a front facing child re-straint in the front seat, see “Child re-straint installation using the seat belts”later in this section.

● Improper use or improper installationof a child restraint can increase the riskor severity of injury for both the childand other occupants of the vehicle andcan lead to serious injury or death in anaccident.

● Follow all of the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for installationand use. When purchasing a child re-straint, be sure to select one which willfit your child and vehicle. It may not bepossible to properly install some typesof child restraints in your vehicle.

● If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being in-jured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

● Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the child restraint, but asupright as possible.

● After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the seatnear the LATCH attachment or by theseat belt path. The child restraintshould not move more than 1 inch (25mm), from side to side. Try to tug itforward and check to see if the beltholds the restraint in place. If the re-straint is not secure, tighten the belt asnecessary, or put the restraint in an-other seat and test it again. You mayneed to try a different child restraint.Not all child restraints fit in all types ofvehicles.

WRS0256



● When your child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with the LATCH systemor a seat belt to prevent it from beingthrown around in case of a sudden stopor accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot.Check the seating surface and bucklesbefore placing your child in the childrestraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal childrestraint lower anchor system, referred to as theLATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-dren) system. Some child restraints include tworigid or webbing-mounted attachments that canbe connected to these lower anchors. For details,see “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible childrestraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. See“Child restraint installation using the seat belts”later in this section. In general, child restraints arealso designed to be installed with a lap/shoulderseat belt.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints forinfants and small children of various sizes. Whenselecting any child restraint, keep the followingpoints in mind:

● Choose only a restraint with a label certifyingthat it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the child restraintand check the various adjustments to besure the child restraint is compatible withyour child. Choose a child restraint that isdesigned for your child’s height and weight.Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated. Canadian law requires thetop tether strap on front-facing child re-straints be secured to the designated an-chor point on the vehicle.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) SYSTEMYour vehicle is equipped with special anchorpoints that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchorsand Tethers for CHildren) system compatiblechild restraints. This system may also be referredto as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.With this system, you do not have to use a vehicleseat belt to secure the child restraint.

LATCH system anchor locationsWRS0795


Z REVIEW COPY—2009 Altima (alt)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)06/18/08—barbara X

The LATCH anchor points are provided to installchild restraints in the rear outboard seating posi-tions only. Do not attempt to install a child re-straint in the center position using the LATCHanchors.

LATCH lower anchor point locations

The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of theseat cushion near the seatback. A label is at-tached to the seatback to help you locate theLATCH anchors.

WARNING

● Attach LATCH system compatible childrestraints only at the locations shown. Ifa child restraint is not secured properly,your child could be seriously injured orkilled in an accident.

● Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position using theLATCH anchors. The child restraint willnot be secured properly.


LATCH lower anchor locationWRS0796

(if so equipped)WRS0829



Installing child restraint LATCH anchorattachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include tworigid or webbing-mounted attachments that canbe connected to two anchors located at certainseating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt tosecure the child restraint. Check your child re-straint for a label stating that it is compatible withLATCH. This information may also be in the in-structions provided by the child restraint manu-facturer.

LATCH child restraints generally require the useof a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap childrestraint” later in this section for installation in-structions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual andthose supplied with the child restraint. See “Childrestraint installation using LATCH” later in thissection.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILDRESTRAINTIf the manufacturer of your child restraint requiresthe use of a top tether strap, it must be secured tothe anchor point.

WARNING


● Do not allow cargo to contact the toptether strap when it is attached to thetop tether anchor. Properly secure thecargo so it does not contact the toptether strap. Cargo that is not properlysecured or cargo that contacts the toptether strap may damage it during acollision. Your child could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision if the toptether strap is damaged.

LATCH webbing-mounted attachmentLRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachmentLRS0662



Top tether anchor point locationsAnchor points s1 are located on the rear parcelshelf.

Installing top tether strap

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCHSystem (rear outboard seating positions only) orthe seat belt, as applicable.

s1 Flip up the anchor cover from the anchorpoint which is located directly behind thechild seat.

s2 Position the top tether strap over the top ofthe seatback.

s3 Secure the tether strap to the tether anchorbracket that provides the straightest installa-tion.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instructions to remove anyslack.

If you have any questions when installing atop tether strap child restraint on the rearseat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de-tails.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONUSING LATCH

WARNING

● Attach LATCH system compatible childrestraints only at the locations shown.For the LATCH lower anchor locationssee “LATCH (Latch Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) system”. If a child restraintis not secured properly, your child couldbe seriously injured or killed in anaccident.

● The LATCH anchors are designed towithstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints. Underno circumstances are they to be usedfor adult seat belts or harnesses.

WRS0797 LRS0798



● Inspect the lower anchors by insertingyour fingers into the lower anchor areaand feeling to make sure there are noobstructions over the LATCH anchors,such as seat belt webbing or seat cush-ion material. The child restraint will notbe secured properly if the LATCH an-chors are obstructed.

Front-facingFollow these steps to install a front-facing childrestraint using LATCH:

1. If the rear seat cushion has a flap s1 , pull theflap down to allow access to the anchors s2 .

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.

3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Checkto make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-erly attached to the lower anchors.

4. The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraintto obtain the correct child restraint fit. See “Headrestraints” earlier in this section.

If the head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to reinstall the head re-straint when the child restraint is removed.

(if so equipped)LRS0824

Front-facing web-mounted – step 3WRS0799



If the seating position does not have an adjust-able head restraint and it is interfering with theproper child restraint fit, try another seating posi-tion or a different child restraint.

5. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

6. If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint. See “Top tether strap child restraint” inthis section.

7. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the seat near theLATCH attachment path. The child restraintshould not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),from side to side. Try to tug it forward andcheck to see if the LATCH attachment holdsthe restraint in place. If the restraint is notsecure, tighten the LATCH attachment asnecessary, or put the restraint in anotherseat and test it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.

Front-facing rigid-mounted – step 3WRS0800

Front-facing – step 5LRS0671

Front-facing – step 7WRS0697



8. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 4through 7.

Rear-facingFollow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint using LATCH System:

1. If the rear seat cushion has a flap s1 , pull theflap down to allow access to the anchors s2 .

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions. Check to make sure theLATCH attachment is properly attached tothe lower anchors.

3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Checkto make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-erly attached to the lower anchors.

(if so equipped)LRS0824

Rear-facing web-mounted – step 3WRS0801



4. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourhand to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

5. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the seat near theLATCH attachment path. The child restraintshould not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),from side to side. Try to tug it forward andcheck to see if the LATCH attachment holdsthe restraint in place. If the restraint is notsecure, tighten the LATCH attachment asnecessary, or put the restraint in anotherseat and test it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 3WRS0802

Rear-facing – step 4LRS0673




6. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 3through 5.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONUSING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front passengerseat. Front air bags inflate with greatforce. A rear-facing child restraint couldbe struck by the front air bag in a crashand could seriously injure or kill yourchild.

● NISSAN recommends that child re-straints be installed in the rear seat.However, if you must install a front-facing child restraint in the front pas-senger seat, move the passenger seatto the rearmost position. Also, be surethe front passenger air bag status lightis illuminated to indicate the passengerair bag is OFF. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in this sec-tion for details.

● The three-point seat belt in your vehicleis equipped with an Automatic LockingRetractor (ALR) which must be usedwhen installing a child restraint.

● Failure to use the ALR mode will resultin the child restraint not being properlysecured. The restraint could tip over orotherwise be unsecured and cause in-jury to the child in a sudden stop orcollision.

● A child restraint with a top tether strapshould not be used in the front passen-ger seat.

The instructions in this section apply to childrestraint installation using the vehicle seat belts inthe rear seat or the front passenger seat.

WRS0256



Front-facing

Follow these steps to install a front-facing childrestraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rearseats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint inthe front seat, it should be placed in afront-facing direction only. Move theseat to the rearmost position. Childrestraints for infants must be used inthe rear-facing direction and thereforemust not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be securedagainst the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraintto obtain the correct child restraint fit. See “Headrestraint adjustment” in this section.

If the head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to reinstall the head re-straint when the child restraint is removed.

If the seating position does not have an adjust-able head restraint and it is interfering with theproper child restraint fit, try another seating posi-tion or a different child restraint. 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

Front-facing (front passenger seat) – step 1WRS0699




4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). It reverts toEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while pulling up on the seatbelt.






7. If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint (rear seat installation only). See “Toptether strap child restraint” in this section.Do not install child restraints that require theuse of a top tether strap to seating positionsthat do not have a top tether anchor.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the seat near the seatbelt path. The child restraint should notmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side toside. Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If therestraint is not secure, tighten the belt asnecessary, or put the restraint in anotherseat and test it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check that the retractor is in the ALR modeby trying to pull more seat belt out of theretractor. If you cannot pull any more beltwebbing out of the retractor, the retractor isin the ALR mode.

10. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 9.

11. If the child restraint is installed in the frontpassenger seat, push the ignition switch tothe ON position. The front passenger air bagstatus light should illuminate. If thislight is not illuminated see 9Front passengerair bag and status light9 in this section.Move the child restraint to anotherseating position. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-straint mode) is canceled.





Rear-facingFollow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rearseats:

1. Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the restraint manufacturer’sinstructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to theEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

Rear-facing – step 1WRS0256





4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the childrestraint; press downward and rearwardfirmly in the center of the child restraint tocompress the vehicle seat cushion and seat-back while pulling up on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-fore you place the child in it. Push it from sideto side while holding the seat near the seatbelt path. The child restraint should notmove more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side toside. Try to tug it forward and check to see ifthe belt holds the restraint in place. If therestraint is not secure, tighten the belt asnecessary, or put the restraint in anotherseat and test it again. You may need to try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.






7. Check that the retractor is in the ALR modeby trying to pull more seat belt out of theretractor. If you cannot pull any more seatbelt webbing out of the retractor, the retrac-tor is in the ALR mode.

8. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 7.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraintmode) is canceled.

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTERSEATS

WARNING

● Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint orbooster seat can result in serious injuryor death.

● Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

● NISSAN recommends that the boosterseat be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat. Ifyou must install a booster seat in thefront seat, see “Booster seat installa-tion” in this section.

● A booster seat must only be installed ina seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a three-point type seat belt with a booster seatcan result in a serious injury in suddenstop or collision.

● Improper use or improper installationof a booster seat can increase the riskor severity of injury for both the childand other occupants of the vehicle andcan lead to serious injury or death in anaccident.

ARS1098

BOOSTER SEATS



● Do not use towels, books, pillows orother items in place of a booster seat.Items such as these may move duringnormal driving or a collision and resultin serious injury or death. Booster seatsare designed to be used with a lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de-signed to properly route the lap andshoulder portions of the seat belt overthe strongest portions of a child’s bodyto provide the maximum protection dur-ing a collision.

● Follow all of the booster seat manufac-turer’s instructions for installation anduse. When purchasing a booster seat,be sure to select one which will fit yourchild and vehicle. It may not be possibleto properly install some types ofbooster seats in your vehicle.

● If the booster seat and seat belt is notused properly, the risk of a child beinginjured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the booster seat, but asupright as possible.

● After placing the child in the boosterseat and fastening the seat belt, makesure the shoulder portion of the belt isaway from the child’s face and neck andthe lap portion of the belt does notcross the abdomen.

● Do not put the shoulder belt behind thechild or under the child’s arm. If youmust install a booster seat in the frontseat, see “Booster seat installation”later in this section.

● When your booster seat is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown around incase of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a booster seat left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot.Check the seating surface and bucklesbefore placing your child in the boosterseat.

Booster seats of various sizes are offered byseveral manufacturers. When selecting anybooster seat, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a booster seat with a labelcertifying that it complies with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213 or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

LRS0455



● Make sure the child’s head will be properlysupported by the booster seat or vehicleseat. The seatback must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. For example, if alow back booster seat s1 is chosen, thevehicle seatback must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. If the seatback islower than the center of the child’s ears, ahigh back booster seat s2 should be used.

● If the booster seat is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the booster seatand check the various adjustments to besure the booster seat is compatible with yourchild. Always follow all recommended pro-cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

The instructions in this section apply to boosterseat installation in the rear seats or the frontpassenger seat.

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

WARNING

NISSAN recommends that booster seatsbe installed in the rear seat. However, ifyou must install a booster seat in the frontpassenger seat, move the passenger’sseat to the rearmost position.

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto-matic Locking Retractor mode when usinga booster seat with the seat belts.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in therear seat or in the front passenger seat:

WRS0813 WRS0811



1. If you must install a booster seat in thefront seat, move the seat to the rear-most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Onlyplace it in a front-facing direction. Alwaysfollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned onthe vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-sary, adjust or remove the head restraint toobtain the correct booster seat fit. See“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in thissection. If the head restraint is removed,store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstallthe head restraint when the booster seat isremoved. If the seating position does nothave an adjustable head restraint and it isinterfering with the proper booster seat fit,try another seating position or a differentbooster seat.

WRS0699Rear center position

LRS0451

Rear outboard positionWRS0812



4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt lowand snug on the child’s hips. Be sure tofollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions for adjusting the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belttoward the retractor to take up extra slack.Be sure the shoulder belt is positionedacross the top, middle portion of the child’sshoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for adjusting thebelt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-tions for properly fastening a seat beltshown in “Three-point seat belt with retrac-tor” earlier in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the frontpassenger seat, push the ignition switch tothe ON position. The front passenger air bagstatus light may or may not illuminate,depending on the size of the child and thetype of booster seat being used. See “Frontpassenger air bag and status light” later inthis section.

Front passenger positionLRS0454 WRS0475



PRECAUTIONS ONSUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-tion contains important information concerningthe following systems:

● Driver and passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air BagSystem)

● Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag

● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-mental air bag

● Seat belt with pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can helpcushion the impact force to the head and chest ofthe driver and front passenger in certain frontalcollisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag system: This system can helpcushion the impact force to the chest and pelvicarea of the driver and front passenger in certainside impact collisions. The side air bags are de-signed to inflate on the side where the vehicle isimpacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-mental air bag system: This system can helpcushion the impact force to the head of occu-pants in front and rear outboard seating positionsin certain side impact collisions. The curtain airbags are designed to inflate on the side wherethe vehicle is impacted.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-signed to supplement the crash protection pro-vided by the driver and front passenger seat beltsand are not a substitute for them. Seat beltsshould always be correctly worn and the occu-pant seated a suitable distance away from thesteering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-ers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section forinstructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion.

After placing the ignition switch in the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM



WARNING

● The front air bags ordinarily will notinflate in the event of a side impact, rearimpact, rollover, or lower severity fron-tal collision. Always wear your seatbelts to help reduce the risk or severityof injury in various kinds of accidents.

● The front passenger air bag will notinflate if the passenger air bag statuslight is lit or if the front passenger seatis unoccupied. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in thissection.

● The seat belts and the front air bags aremost effective when you are sitting wellback and upright in the seat. The frontair bags inflate with great force. Evenwith the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem, if you are unrestrained, leaningforward, sitting sideways or out of posi-tion in any way, you are at greater risk ofinjury or death in a crash. You may alsoreceive serious or fatal injuries from thefront air bag if you are up against itwhen it inflates. Always sit back againstthe seatback and as far away as practi-cal from the steering wheel or instru-ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

● The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. TheAdvanced Air Bag System monitors theseverity of a collision and seat belt us-age then inflates the air bags. Failure toproperly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in anaccident.

● The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(pattern sensor) that turns the frontpassenger air bag OFF under someconditions. This sensor is only used inthis seat. Failure to be properly seatedand wearing the seat belt can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an acci-dent. See “Front Passenger air bag andstatus light” later in this section.

● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-ing wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when the frontair bag inflates.

WRS0031



WARNING

● Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041



ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044



WARNING

● Children may be severely injured orkilled when the front air bags, side airbags or curtain air bags inflate if theyare not properly restrained. Pre-teensand children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat, if possible.

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating front air bag could seriously in-jure or kill your child. See “Child re-straints” earlier in this section fordetails.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bags and roof-mounted curtainside-impact supplemental air bags:

● The side air bags and curtain air bagsordinarily will not inflate in the event ofa frontal impact, rear impact, rollover orlower severity side collision. Alwayswear your seat belts to help reduce therisk or severity of injury in various kindsof accidents.

ARS1045 ARS1046 SSS0101



WARNING

● The seat belts, the side air bags andcurtain air bags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back and upright inthe seat with both feet on the floor. Theside air bag and curtain air bag inflatewith great force. Do not allow anyone toplace their hand, leg or face near theside air bag on the side of the seatbackof the front seat or near the side roofrails. Do not allow anyone sitting in thefront seats or rear outboard seats toextend their hand out of the window orlean against the door. Some examplesof dangerous riding positions areshown in the previous illustrations. WARNING

● When sitting in the rear seat, do nothold onto the seatback of the front seat.If the side air bag inflates, you may beseriously injured. Be especially carefulwith children, who should always beproperly restrained. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

● Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere with sideair bag inflation.

WRS0032 SSS0159



SSS0162



1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impactsupplemental air bag inflators

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impactsupplemental air bags

3. Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag modules

4. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)5. Supplemental front-impact air bag

modules6. Crash zone sensor7. Seat belt buckle switches on driver’s

and passenger’s side8. Occupant classification sensor

(pattern sensor)9. Occupant classification system control

unit10. Seat belt with pretensioner11. Side satellite sensor

CoupeWRS0845



NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-vanced Air Bag System for the driver and frontpassenger seats. This system is designed tomeet certification requirements under U.S. regu-lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,all of the information, cautions and warn-ings in this manual still apply and must befollowed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag islocated in the center of the steering wheel. Thepassenger supplemental front-impact air bag ismounted in the dashboard above the glove box.The front air bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity frontal collisions, although they may in-flate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper front air bag system opera-tion.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dualstage air bag inflators. It also monitors informa-tion from the crash zone sensor, the Air bagControl Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors andthe occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-sor). Inflator operation is based on the severity ofa collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For

SedanWRS0844



the front passenger, the occupant classificationsensor is also monitored. Based on informationfrom the sensors, only one front air bag mayinflate in a crash, depending on the crash severityand whether the front occupants are belted orunbelted. Additionally, the front passenger airbag may be automatically turned OFF undersome conditions, depending on the informationprovided by the occupant classification sensor. Ifthe front passenger air bag is OFF, the passengerair bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat isunoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, butthe air bag will be off). See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in this section forfurther details. One front air bag inflating does notindicate improper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bagsystem, please contact NISSAN or your NISSANdealer. If you are considering modification of yourvehicle due to a disability, you may also contactNISSAN. Contact information is contained in thefront of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noisemay be heard, followed by the release of smoke.This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate afire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,help to cushion the impact force on the face andchest of the front occupants. They can help savelives and reduce serious injuries. However, aninflating front air bag may cause facial abrasionsor other injuries. Front air bags do not providerestraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat beltsshould be correctly worn and the driver and pas-senger seated upright as far as practical awayfrom the steering wheel or instrument panel. Thefront air bags inflate quickly in order to helpprotect the front occupants. Because of this, theforce of the front air bag inflating can increase therisk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or isagainst, the front air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when theignition switch is in the ON position.


Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some con-ditions. Read this section carefully tolearn how it operates. Proper use of theseat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-essary for most effective protection. Fail-ure to follow all instructions in thismanual concerning the use of seats, seatbelts and child restraints can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.

WRS0475



Status light

The front passenger air bag status light islocated on the instrument panel above the radiocontrols. The light operates as follows:

● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The isOFF and the front passenger air bag is OFFand will not inflate in a crash.

● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,child or child restraint as outlined in thissection: The illuminates to indicatethat the front passenger air bag is OFF andwill not inflate in a crash.

● Occupied passenger seat and the passen-ger meets the conditions outlined in thissection: The light is OFF to indicatethat the front passenger air bag is opera-tional.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operatedunder some conditions as described below inaccordance with U.S. regulations. If the frontpassenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in acrash. The driver air bag and other air bags in yourvehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reducethe risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

to certain front passenger seat occupants, suchas children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-matically turned OFF.

The occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-sor) is in the front passenger seat cushion and isdesigned to detect an occupant and objects onthe seat. For example, if a child is in the frontpassenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System isdesigned to turn the passenger air bag OFF inaccordance with the regulations. Also, if a childrestraint of the type specified in the regulations ison the seat, the occupant classification sensorcan detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who areproperly seated and using the seat belt as out-lined in this manual should not cause the passen-ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Forsmall adults it may be turned OFF, however if theoccupant does not sit in the seat properly (forexample, by not sitting upright, by sitting on anedge of the seat, or by otherwise being out ofposition), this could cause the sensor to turn theair bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated andwearing the seat belt properly for the most effec-tive protection by the seat belt and supplementalair bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child

restraints and booster seats be properly installedin a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupantclassification sensor is designed to operate asdescribed above to turn the front passenger airbag OFF for specified child restraints as requiredby the regulations. Failing to properly securechild restraints and to use the ALR mode (childrestraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip ormove in an accident or sudden stop. This canalso result in the passenger air bag inflating in acrash instead of being OFF. See “Child re-straints” earlier in this section for proper use andinstallation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, thepassenger air bag is designed not to inflate in acrash. However, heavy objects placed on theseat could result in air bag inflation, because ofthe object being detected by the occupant clas-sification sensor. Other conditions could alsoresult in air bag inflation, such as if a child isstanding on the seat, or if two children are on theseat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupantsare seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you canmonitor when the front passenger air bag is au-tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.The light will not illuminate when the front pas-senger seat is unoccupied.



If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicatingthat the air bag is OFF), it could be that theperson is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seatproperly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,the passenger air bag status light may or may notbe illuminated, depending on the size of the childand the type of child restraint being used. If the airbag status light is not illuminated (indicating thatthe air bag might inflate in a crash), it could bethat the child restraint or seat belt is not beingused properly. Make sure that the child restraint isinstalled properly, the seat belt is used properlyand the occupant is positioned properly. If the airbag status light is not illuminated, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-minate even though you believe that the childrestraint, the seat belts and the occupant areproperly positioned, the system may be sensingan unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag isOFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that thesystem is OFF by using a special tool. However,until you have confirmed with your dealer thatyour air bag is working properly, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and passenger air bag statuslight will take a few seconds to register a changein the passenger seat status. However, if the seatbecomes unoccupied, the air bag status light willremain off.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger airbag system, the supplemental air bag warninglight , located in the meter and gauges areain the center of the instrument panel, will blink.Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Other supplemental front-impact air bagprecautions

WARNING

● Do not place any objects on the steer-ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Such ob-jects may become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if the front airbags inflate.

● Do not place objects with sharp edgeson the seat. Also, do not place heavyobjects on the seat that will leave per-manent impressions in the seat. Suchobjects can damage the seat or occu-pant classification sensor (pattern sen-sor). This can affect the operation of theair bag system and result in seriouspersonal injury.

● Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hotsteam cleaners) on the seat. This candamage the seat or occupant classifica-tion sensor. This can also affect theoperation of the air bag system andresult in serious personal injury.

● Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components will behot. Do not touch them; you may se-verely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. This isto prevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.



● Tampering with the front air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.Tampering includes changes to thesteering wheel and the instrumentpanel assembly by placing materialover the steering wheel pad and abovethe instrument panel or by installingadditional trim material around the airbag system.

● Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat that are not specifi-cally designed to assure proper air bagoperation. Additionally, do not stow anyobjects under the front passenger seator the seat cushion and seatback. Suchobjects may interfere with the properoperation of the occupant classifica-tion sensor.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affect thefront air bag system. Tampering withthe seat belt system may result in seri-ous personal injury.

● Work on and around the front air bagsystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. The Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) wiring should not bemodified or disconnected. Unautho-rized electrical test equipment andprobing devices should not be used onthe air bag system.

● A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshield couldaffect the function of the supplementalair bag system.

● The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easyidentification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the front air bag systemand guide the buyer to the appropriate sectionsin this Owner’s Manual.

Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impactsupplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of theseatback of the front seats. The curtain air bagsare located in the side roof rails. These systemsare designed to meet voluntary guidelines to helpreduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occu-pants. However, all of the information, cau-tions and warnings in this manual still ap-ply and must be followed. The side air bagsand curtain air bags are designed to inflate inhigher severity side collisions, although they may

WRS0816



inflate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity side impact.They are designed to inflate on the side where thevehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in cer-tain side collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper side air bag and curtain airbag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bagsinflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followedby release of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire. Care should be takennot to inhale it, as it may cause irritation andchoking. Those with a history of a breathing con-dition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,help to cushion the impact force on the chest andpelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain airbags help to cushion the impact force to the headof occupants in the front and rear outboard seat-ing positions. They can help save lives and re-duce serious injuries. However, an inflating sideair bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasionsor other injuries. Side air bags and curtain airbags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as far aspractical away from the side air bag. Rear seatpassengers should be seated as far away as

practical from the door finishers and side roofrails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflatequickly in order to help protect the front occu-pants. Because of this, the force of the side airbag and curtain air bag inflating can increase therisk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or isagainst, these air bag modules during inflation.The side air bags and curtain air bag will deflatequickly after the collision is over.

The side air bags and curtain air bags op-erate only when the ignition switch is in theON position.


WARNING

● Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisherand the front seat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectiles andcause injury if a side air bag inflates.

● Right after inflation, several side air bagand curtain air bag system componentswill be hot. Do not touch them; you mayseverely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe side air bag and curtain air bagsystems. This is to prevent damage to oraccidental inflation of the side air bagand curtain air bag or damage to theside air bag and curtain air bag systems.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or side panel. Thiscould affect proper operation of theside air bag and curtain air bag systems.

● Tampering with the side air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.For example, do not change the frontseats by placing material near the seat-backs or by installing additional trimmaterial, such as seat covers, aroundthe side air bag.



● Work around and on the side air bagand curtain air bag system should bedone by a NISSAN dealer. Installationof electrical equipment should also bedone by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-ing harnesses* should not be modifiedor disconnected. Unauthorized electri-cal test equipment and probing devicesshould not be used on the side air bagor curtain air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the side air bag andcurtain air bag systems and guide the buyer tothe appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Seat belts with pretensioners (Frontseats)

WARNING

● The pretensioners cannot be reused af-ter activation. They must be replacedtogether with the retractor and buckleas a unit.

● If the vehicle becomes involved in afrontal collision but a pretensioner isnot activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if nec-essary, replaced by your NISSANdealer.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pretensioner system. This is to pre-vent damage to or accidental activationof the pretensioners. Tampering withthe pretensioner system may result inserious personal injury.

● Work around and on the pretensionersystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the pretensioner system.

● If you need to dispose of a pretensioneror scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSANdealer. Correct pretensioner disposalprocedures are set forth in the appropri-ate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrectdisposal procedures could cause per-sonal injury.

The pretensioner system activates in conjunctionwith the front air bag system. Working with theseat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat beltwhen the vehicle becomes involved in certaintypes of collisions, helping to restrain front seatoccupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat beltretractor. These seat belts are used the same wayas conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-leased and a loud noise may be heard. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters allowthe seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) toreduce forces against the chest.

If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys-tem, the supplemental air bag warninglight will not come on, will flash intermit-tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain onafter the ignition key has been turned to the ON orSTART position. In this case, the pretensionermay not function properly. They must be checkedand repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearestNISSAN dealer.



When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pretensioner systemand guide the buyer to the appropriate sectionsin this Owner’s Manual.

1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (locatedon the sun visors)

2. SRS Air Bag Warning Label (located onthe door pillar)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELSWarning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag, front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtainside-impact supplemental air bag systems areplaced in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel, moni-tors the circuits of the supplemental front-impactair bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impactsupplemental air bag and seat belt pretensionersystems. The monitored circuits include the Airbag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, sat-ellite sensors, front air bag modules, side air bagmodules, curtain air bag modules, pretensionersand all related wiring.

WRS0169 LRS0100



When the ignition is placed in the ON position,the supplemental air bag warning light illuminatesfor about 7 seconds and then turns off. Thismeans the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the frontair bag, side air bag and curtain air bag andpretensioner systems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side airbag and curtain air bag or pretensioner systemsmay not operate properly. They must be checkedand repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearestNISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the front air bag,side air bags, curtain air bag and/or pre-tensioner systems will not operate in anaccident. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle checked by aNISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bagsand pretensioners are designed to inflate on aone-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it isdamaged, the supplemental air bag warning lightremains illuminated after inflation has occurred.Repair and replacement of these supplementalair bag systems should be done only by aNISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain airbags, pretensioners and related parts should bepointed out to the person performing the mainte-nance. The ignition should always be in the LOCKposition when working under the hood or insidethe vehicle.

WARNING

● Once a front air bag, side air bag, orcurtain air bag has inflated, the air bagmodule will not function again andmust be replaced. Additionally, if any ofthe front air bags inflate, the activatedpretensioners must also be replaced.The air bag module and pretensionersshould be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.The air bag module and pretensionerscannot be repaired.

● The front air bag, side air bag, curtainair bag systems and the pretensionersystem should be inspected by aNISSAN dealer if there is any damage tothe front end or side portion of thevehicle.

● If you need to dispose of a supplemen-tal air bag or pretensioners or scrap thevehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Cor-rect supplemental air bag and preten-sioner system disposal procedures areset forth in the appropriate NISSANService Manual. Incorrect disposal pro-cedures could cause personal injury.




MEMO

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-10Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Vehicle information display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . . 2-17

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Xenon headlights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-32Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34Traction Control System (TCS) off switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37

Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Seatback pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37Storage pouch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Storage box (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42


Covered storage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Grocery hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Cargo net (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44

Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Console light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

HomeLinkT universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . . 2-51Programming HomeLinkT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51Programming HomeLinkT for Canadiancustomers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52Operating the HomeLinkT universaltransceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53Rolling code programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53Reprogramming a single HomeLinkT button . . . . . . 2-54If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54


1. Vents (P. 4-10)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-29)3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

(if so equipped)/BluetoothT hands-freephone system (if so equipped)(P. 4-44, P. 4-46, P. 4-61)

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-42, P. 2-34)6. Cruise control main/set switch

(P. 5-19)7. Windshield wiper/washer switch

(P. 2-27)

8. Ignition switch (P. 5-7)9. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-33)10. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-51)11. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-42)12. Glove box (P. 2-41)13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)

(P. 4-2)14. Heater and air conditioner (manual or

automatic) (P. 4-11, P. 4-18)15. Shift selector (P. 5-11)16. Audio system controls (if so equipped)/

Storage (if so equipped) (P. 4-21)17. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls

(P. 3-27)18. Vehicle information display controls

(P. 2-17)19. Hood release (P. 3-23)20. Traction Control System (TCS) OFF

switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-25)Trunk opener (P. 3-23)Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch (if so equipped) (P. 2-35)Intelligent Key port (P. 5-7)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation SystemOwner’s Manual.

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WIC1258

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls


1. Tachometer2. Speedometer3. Fuel gauge4. Engine coolant temperature gauge5. Odometer/twin trip odometer6. Twin trip odometer change button

7. Vehicle information display8. Instrument brightness control

1. Speedometer2. Change button3. Odometer/twin trip odometer

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer s1 indicates vehicle speed inmiles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour(km/h).

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayedwhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition.

WIC1259

WIC1418

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3


The odometer records the total distance the ve-hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance ofindividual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the change button changes the displayas follows:

Trip → Trip → Trip

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-ond resets the currently displayed trip odometerto zero.

TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine intothe red zone s1 .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-gine speed. Operating the engine in thered zone may cause serious enginedamage.

WIC1261 LIC1058



ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-ture. The engine coolant temperature is within thenormal range s1 when the gauge needle pointswithin the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with theoutside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-ture near the hot (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If the gauge is over the nor-mal range, stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible. If the engine is over-heated, continued operation of the ve-hicle may seriously damage the engine.See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “Incase of emergency”section for immediateaction required.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after theignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The low fuel warning light comes on when theamount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters E (Empty).

LIC1059 LIC1060



The indicates that the fuel-filler door islocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon aspossible. After a few driving trips,

the light should turn off. If the

light remains on after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see “Mal-function Indicator Light (MIL)” later inthis section.

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-dicates the direction of the vehicle’s heading.

With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi-tion, press the button as described in thechart below to activate various features of theautomatic anti-glare rearview mirror.

Push and hold

thebutton for about:

Feature:(Push button again for about 1 sec-ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

5 secondsCompass zone can be changed tocorrect false compass readings

9 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

For information about the automatic anti-glarefeature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearviewmirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-ments” section.

Push the button for about 1 second whenthe ignition switch is placed in the ON position totoggle the compass display s1 on or off. Thedisplay will indicate the direction of the vehicle’sheading.

N: NorthE: EastS: SouthW: West

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass bydriving the vehicle in three complete circles atless than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

LIC0583

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)



You can also calibrate the compass by drivingyour vehicle on your everyday route. The com-pass will be calibrated once it has tracked threecomplete circles.

COMPASS DISPLAY

Push the button when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position. The direction will bedisplayed.

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north and geo-graphical north is known as variance. In someareas, this difference can sometimes be greatenough to cause false compass readings. Followthese instructions to set the variance for yourparticular location if this happens:

1. Establish your location on the zone map.Refer to the illustration. Record your zonenumber.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. Push the button in for 5 seconds untilthe current zone entry number is displayed.

4. Press the button repeatedly until thedesired zone entry number is displayed.

Once the desired zone number is displayed, stoppressing the button and the display willshow compass direction within a few seconds.

NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.



● If a magnet is located near the com-pass or the vehicle is driven where theterrestrial magnetism is disturbed, thecompass display may not indicate thecorrect direction.

● In places where the terrestrial magne-tism is disturbed, the correction of thedirection starts automatically.

Inaccurate compass direction:

The compass display is equipped with automaticcorrection function. If the correct direction is notshown, follow this procedure.

1. With the display turned on, press and holdthe switch for about 9 seconds. Thedisplay will read “C.”

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehiclein three complete circles at a maximumspeed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles the displayshould return to normal.

● If the compass deviates from the correctindication soon after repeated adjustment,have the compass checked at an authorizedNISSAN dealer.

WIC0355



● The compass may not indicate the correctcompass point in tunnels or while driving upor down a steep hill. (The compass returnsto the correct compass point when the ve-hicle moves to an area where the geomag-netism is stabilized.)

CAUTION

● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,which are attached to the vehicle bymeans of a magnet. They affect the op-eration of the compass.

● When cleaning the mirror, use a papertowel or similar material dampenedwith glass cleaner. Do not spray glasscleaner directly on the mirror as it maycause the liquid cleaner to enter themirror housing.



or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ warning light Security indicator light

or Brake warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

Charge warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Traction Control System off indicator light (if soequipped)

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)check warning light (if so equipped)

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) po-sition indicator light (if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light Vehicle Dynamic Control off indicator light (ifso equipped)

Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)

Master warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brakeand place the ignition switch in the ON positionwithout starting the engine. The following lightswill come on:

, or , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then gooff:

or , , , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicatea burned-out bulb or an open circuit in theelectrical system. Have the system repairedpromptly.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS



WARNING LIGHTSor Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light illuminates and then turns off. Thisindicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while theengine is running, or while driving, it may indicatethe ABS is not functioning properly. Have thesystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-tion is turned off. The brake system then operatesnormally, but without anti-lock assistance. See9Brake system9 in the 9Starting and driving9 sec-tion.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake andthe foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on when the parkingbrake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.If the light comes on while the engine is runningwith the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-hicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked by a NISSANdealer.

WARNING

● Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on. Driv-ing could be dangerous. If you judge itto be safe, drive carefully to the nearestservice station for repairs. Otherwise,have your vehicle towed because driv-ing it could be dangerous.

● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked at aNISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the charging system is not func-tioning properly. Turn the engine off and checkthe drive belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing,or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN dealerimmediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the drive belt isloose, broken or missing.

Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) checkwarning light (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, the light comes on for about 2 seconds.If the light comes on at any other time, it mayindicate the CVT system is not functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.



Engine oil pressure warninglight

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If thelight flickers or comes on during normal driving,pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engineimmediately and call a NISSAN dealer or otherauthorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is notdesigned to indicate a low oil level. Use thedipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could cause se-rious damage to the engine almost imme-diately. Such damage is not covered bywarranty. Turn off the engine as soon as itis safe to do so.

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tirepressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of lowtire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is notfunctioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light illuminates for about 1 secondand turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure, the warning light will illuminate.

When the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates, you should stop and adjust thetire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-mended COLD tire pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label locatedin the driver’s door opening. The low tirepressure warning light does not automati-cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-ommended pressure, the vehicle must bedriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)to activate the TPMS and turn off the lowtire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-sure gauge to check the tire pressure.

For additional information, see “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving”section and in the “In case of emergency”section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the lowtire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-mately 1 minute when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position. The light will remain onafter the 1 minute. Have the system checked by aNISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

WARNING

● If the light does not illuminate with theignition switch placed in the ON posi-tion, have the vehicle checked by aNISSAN dealer as soon as possible.



● If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Driving with under-inflated tires maypermanently damage the tires and in-crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-rious vehicle damage could occur andmay lead to an accident and could re-sult in serious personal injury. Checkthe tire pressure for all four tires. Adjustthe tire pressure to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure shown on the Tireand Loading Information label locatedin the driver’s door opening to turn thelow tire pressure warning light OFF. Ifthe light still illuminates while drivingafter adjusting the tire pressure, a tiremay be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-place it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced tire pressure will not be in-dicated, the TPMS will not function andthe low tire pressure warning light willflash for approximately 1 minute. Thelight will remain on after 1 minute. Con-tact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

● Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by NISSAN could affect theproper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

● The TPMS is not a substitute for theregular tire pressure check. Be sure tocheck the tire pressure regularly.

● If the vehicle is being driven at speedsof less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), theTPMS may not operate correctly.

● Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Master warning light

This light comes on when various vehicle infor-mation display warnings appear.

NISSAN Intelligent Key™warning light

The Intelligent Key warning light warns of a mal-function with the electrical steering lock systemor the Intelligent Key system.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light comes on for about 2 secondsand then turns off.

If the light comes on while the engine is stopped,it may not be possible to free the steering lock orto start the engine. If the light comes on while theengine is running, you can drive the vehicle. How-ever, in these cases, contact a NISSAN dealer forrepair as soon as possible.

See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped)”in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-tion.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fasten yourseat belts. The light illuminates whenever theignition switch is placed in the ON or STARTposition and remains illuminated until the driver’sseat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chimesounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’sseat belt is securely fastened.



The seat belt warning light may also illuminate ifthe front passenger’s seat belt is not fastenedwhen the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed inthe ON position, the system does not activate thewarning light for the front passenger.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system” sectionfor precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warninglight

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON orSTART position, the supplemental air bag warn-ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and thenturns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-sioner systems need servicing and your vehiclemust be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplementalrestraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-tensioners may not function properly. For addi-tional details, see “Supplemental restraint sys-tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the front air bag,side air bag, curtain air bag systems (if soequipped) and/or pretensioner systemswill not operate in an accident. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others, haveyour vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealeras soon as possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

For additional information on warnings and indi-cators, see “Vehicle information display” later inthis section.

Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) positionindicator light (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this indicator light shows the shift selec-

tor position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Front passenger air bag statuslight

The front passenger air bag status light ( )will be lit and the passenger front air bag will beOFF depending on how the front passenger seatis being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation,see “Front passenger air bag and status light” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight highbeams are on and goes out when the low beamsare selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes onwhen the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indicate apotential emission control malfunction.



The Malfunction Indicator Light may also comeon steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to makesure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closedtightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light shouldturn off if no other potential emission controlsystem malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds whenthe engine is not running, it indicates that thevehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

Operation

The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on inone of two ways:

● Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — Anemission control system malfunction hasbeen detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. Ifthe fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tightenor install the cap and continue to drive thevehicle. The light should turn off aftera few driving trips. If the light does notturn off after a few driving trips, have thevehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. Youdo not need to have your vehicle towed tothe dealer.

● Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — Anengine misfire has been detected which maydamage the emission control system. To re-duce or avoid emission control system dam-age:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled or towed.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinkingand come on steady. Have the vehicle inspectedby a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-ing the emission control system checkedand repaired as necessary could lead topoor driveability, reduced fuel economy,and possible damage to the emission con-trol system.

Security indicator light

This light blinks when the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.

The blinking security indicator light indicates thatthe security systems equipped on the vehicle areoperational.

For additional information, see “Security sys-tems” later in this section.

Slip indicator light (if soequipped)

This indicator light will blink when the tractioncontrol system (if so equipped) or vehicle dy-namic control system (if so equipped) is limitingwheel spin. Slippery road conditions may exist ifthe slip indicator blinks on. If this happens, adjustyour driving accordingly.

The slip indicator light also comes on when youplace the ignition switch in the ON position. The



light will turn off after about 2 seconds if thesystem is operational. If the light does not comeon or does not go off, have the Traction ControlSystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Traction Control System offindicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the tractioncontrol off switch is pushed to OFF. This indi-cates the Traction Control System is not operat-ing.

Push the traction control off switch again or re-start the engine and the system will operate nor-mally. See “Traction Control System (TCS)” in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

The traction control light also comes on when youplace the ignition switch in the ON position. Thelight will turn off after about 2 seconds if theTraction Control System (TCS) is operational. Ifthe light stays on or comes on along with the SLIPindicator light while you are driving, have theTraction Control System checked by a NISSANdealer.

While the Traction Control System is operating,you might feel slight vibration or hear the systemworking when starting the vehicle or accelerat-ing, but this is normal.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signalswitch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turnedon.

Vehicle Dynamic Control offindicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the VehicleDynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF.This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control hasbeen turned off.

Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switchagain or restart the engine and the system willoperate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion of this manual.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes onwhen you place the ignition switch in the ONposition. The light will turn off after about 2 sec-onds if the system is operational. If the light stayson or comes on along with the SLIP indicator lightwhile you are driving, have the Vehicle DynamicControl system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system isoperating, you might feel slight vibration or hear

the system working when starting the vehicle oraccelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.When a disc brake pad requires replacement, itmakes a high pitched scraping sound when thevehicle is in motion, whether or not the brakepedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ door buzzer(if so equipped)

The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if theIntelligent Key is left inside the vehicle whenlocking the doors. When the buzzer sounds, besure to check both the vehicle and the IntelligentKey. See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if soequipped)” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-ments” section.

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is openedwhile the ignition switch is placed in the ACC orOFF position or placed in the OFF or LOCKposition with the Intelligent Key left in the Intelli-gent Key port. Make sure the ignition switch is



placed in the LOCK position, and take the Intel-ligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chimeWith the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door isopened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-ing the vehicle.

The vehicle information display s1 is located onthe bottom of the speedometer. It displays suchitems as:

● cruise control system information

● Intelligent Key operation information

● some indicators and warnings

● other information

For details about the Intelligent Key, see“NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in the “Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” section.

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLEINFORMATION DISPLAY

Press the button, located on the instru-ment panel just behind the steering wheel, todisplay the following modes:

MPG → MPG/MPH → Time/Miles → Range →Exterior Temperature → Setting → Warning

WIC1102 LIC1103

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY



Fuel Economy mode

The fuel economy mode can be selected to dis-play the instant fuel economy since the last reset.

Average speed mode

The average speed mode can be selected todisplay the average miles per gallon and miles perhour since the last reset.

Time/Miles (km) mode

The time/miles (km) mode can be selected toshow the time and distance driven since the lastreset.

LIC1093 LIC1097 WIC1266



Range mode

The range mode can be selected to give you anestimation of the distance that can be drivenbefore refueling. The range is constantly calcu-lated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tankand the actual fuel consumption.

Exterior Temperature mode

The exterior temperature mode can be selectedto provide you with the temperature outside ofyour vehicle.

Setting mode

The setting mode allows you to set reminders orpreferences for alerts, maintenance intervals orlanguage displays.

In the setting mode screen press to moveto:

● Alert

● Maintenance

● Display

and press to select the menu.

LIC1095 LIC1096 LIC1043



Alert mode

The alert mode allows you to set alerts notifyingyou of time to rest or icy conditions.

The time to rest alert lets you know when youhave been traveling for a long time and may needa break.

The icy alert notifies you that icy driving condi-tions may exist.

Reset mode

The reset mode can be selected in any screenthat allows for preferences to be programmed.Once the screen is selected, you have the optionto reset the selected distances or time to a newsetting.

Maintenance mode

The maintenance mode allows you to set alertsfor the reminding of maintenance intervals for thefollowing:

● engine oil

● oil filter

● tires

● other

Set a desired interval by pushing to high-light the maintenance field and pressing .The reset mode will open up and allow you toenter the desired distance.

LIC1044 LIC1046 LIC1045



Display mode

The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear whenselecting the “Language/Unit” key andpressing .

Language: English or French

Unit: US — mile, °F, MPGMetric — km, °C, L/100 km

You can select the language and unit using

the button and pressing .

The settings are automatically saved when youexit the menu by pressing the BACK button orany other mode button.

Warning mode

The warning mode can be selected to view anywarnings that may be present. Once the screen isselected you have the option of skipping thewarning or viewing it in detail.

Warnings can be present for issues such as anopen door or low fuel. For more information aboutpotential warnings see “Vehicle Information Dis-play indicator lights and warnings” later in thissection.

LIC1047 LIC1098



Vehicle information display warningsand indicators

1. Door and trunk open warning

2. Push warning (CVT models)

3. Low fuel warning

4. Low windshield washer fluid warning

5. No key warning

6. Parking brake warning

7. Shift P warning (CVT models)

8. Cruise main switch indicator

9. Cruise set switch indicator

10. Engine start operation indicator (CVT mod-els)

WIC1275



11. Engine start operation indicator (MT mod-els)

12. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ insertion indicator

13. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ removal indicator

14. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery dischargeindicator

15. Steering lock release malfunction indicator

Door and trunk open warning

This warning illuminates when a door or the trunkhas been opened when the engine is running.

Push warning (CVT models)

After the Shift P warning illuminates, the Pushwarning will illuminate if the ignition switch isplaced in the ACC position when the shift selec-tor is moved to the P (Park) position.

See “Shift P warning (CVT models)” in this sec-tion for additional information.

To turn off the Push warning, place the ignitionswitch in the ON position and then in the LOCKposition.

Low fuel warning

This warning illuminates when the fuel level in thefuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it isconvenient, preferably before the fuel gaugereaches E (Empty). There will be a small re-

serve of fuel in the tank when the fuelgauge needle reaches E (Empty).

Low windshield washer fluid warning

This warning illuminates when the windshieldwasher fluid is at a low level. Add windshieldwasher fluid as necessary. See “Window washerfluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

No key warning

This warning illuminates following two condi-tions:

1. When the ignition switch is pushed and theIntelligent Key cannot be recognized by thesystem. If this warning illuminates, you can-not start the engine.

Check for the following causes and performthe assigned remedies:

– The battery of the Intelligent Key carriedwith you is discharged completely. Re-place the battery with a new one.

– The Intelligent Key carried with you is notregistered to the system. Use the regis-tered Intelligent Key.

– You do not have an Intelligent Key withyou. Carry an Intelligent Key with you.

2. When the door is closed with the IntelligentKey left outside the vehicle and the ignitionswitch is placed in the ACC or ON position.A chime will also sound.

Parking brake warning

This warning illuminates when the parking brakeis set and the vehicle is driven.

SHIFT P warning (CVT models)

This warning illuminates when the ignition switchis pushed to stop the engine with the shift selec-tor in any position except in the P (Park) position.

If this warning illuminates, the ignition switch isplaced in the OFF position. Move the shift selec-tor to the P (Park) position or place the ignitionswitch in the ON position.

An inside warning chime will also sound.

If the shift selector is moved to the P (Park)position, the Push warning will appear. Refer to“Push warning (CVT models)” in this section.

For additional information about Intelligent Key,see “NISSAN Intelligent Key™ (if so equipped)” inthe “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-tion.

Cruise main switch indicator

This indicator illuminates when the cruise controlmain switch is pushed. The indicator turns off



when the main switch is pushed again. When thecruise main switch indicator illuminates, thecruise control system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicator

This indicator illuminates while the vehicle speedis controlled by the cruise control system. If theindicator blinks while the engine is running, it mayindicate the cruise control system is not function-ing properly. Have the system checked by aNISSAN dealer.

Engine start operation indicator (CVT mod-els)

This indicator illuminates when the ignition switchis placed in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON positionwith the shift selector in the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will start bypushing the push-button ignition switch with thebrake pedal depressed.

Engine start operation indicator (MT mod-els)

This indicator illuminates when the ignition switchis placed in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON positionwith the shift selector in neutral and the parkingbrake on.

This indicator means that the engine will start bypushing the ignition switch with the clutch andthe brake pedal depressed.

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ insertion indica-tor

This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Keyneeds to be inserted into the Intelligent Key port.(For example, the Intelligent Key battery is dis-charged.)

If this indicator illuminates, insert the IntelligentKey into the Intelligent Key port in the correctdirection. See “Push-button ignition switch” inthe “Starting and driving” section.

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ removal indicator

This indicator illuminates when the driver’s dooris opened with the ignition switch placed in theOFF position and the Intelligent Key placed in theIntelligent Key port. A key reminder chime alsosounds.

If this indicator illuminates, remove the IntelligentKey from the Intelligent Key port and take it withyou when leaving the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery dischargeindicator

This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Keybattery is running out of power.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the batterywith a new one. See “Intelligent Key battery” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

Steering lock release malfunction indica-tor

This indicator illuminates when the steeringwheel cannot be released from the LOCK posi-tion.

If this indicator illuminates, push the ignitionswitch while lightly turning the steering wheelright and left.



Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-tems:

● Vehicle security system

● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEMThe vehicle security system provides visual andaudible alarm signals if someone opens the doorsor trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not,however, a motion detection type system thatactivates when a vehicle is moved or when avibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannotprevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or

exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-ways secure your vehicle even if parking for abrief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key inthe vehicle, and always lock the vehicle whenunattended. Be aware of your surroundings, andpark in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, suchas component locks, identification markers, andtracking systems, are available at auto supplystores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealermay also offer such equipment. Check with yourinsurance company to see if you may be eligiblefor discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows. (The system can bearmed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.

3. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock alldoors. The doors can be locked with theIntelligent Key, door handle request switch,power door lock switch or mechanical key.

4. Confirm that the security indicator lightcomes on. The security light stays on forabout 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys-tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec-onds the vehicle security system automati-

cally shifts into the armed phase. Thesecurity light begins to flash once every 3seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-armtime period, the driver’s door is unlocked bythe key or the keyfob, or the ignition switch isplaced in the ACC or ON position, the sys-tem will not arm.

● Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willactivate with all the doors, hood andtrunk lid locked with the ignitionswitch placed in the LOCK position.When placing the ignition switch in theACC or ON position, the system will bereleased.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the followingalarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently.

● The alarm automatically turns off after ap-proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarmreactivates if the vehicle is tampered withagain. The alarm can be shut off by unlockingthe driver’s door or trunk lid with the key, orby pressing the button on the Intelli-gent Key.

LIC0301

SECURITY SYSTEMS



The alarm is activated by:

● opening the door or trunk lid without usingthe key or Intelligent Key (even if the door isunlocked by releasing the door inside lockswitch).

How to stop an activated alarmThe alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’sdoor or the trunk lid with the key, or by pressingthe button on the Intelligent Key.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEMThe NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of aregistered key.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCCRules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULDVOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-ATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever theignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACCposition. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-hicle Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-functioning, the light will remain on while theignition switch is placed in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer forNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-vice as soon as possible. Please bring allregistered keys that you have when visitingyour NISSAN dealer for service.

LIC0474



SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer switch oper-ates when the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at thefollowing speed:

s1 Intermittent — intermittent operation can beadjusted by turning the switch toward sA(Slower) or sB (Faster). Also, for vehiclesequipped with speed dependent wipers, theintermittent operation speed varies in accor-dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-tent operation speed will be faster.)

s2 Low — continuous low speed operation

s3 High — continuous high speed operation

Push the lever up s4 to have one sweep opera-tion of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you s5 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield andobscure your vision which may lead to anaccident. Warm the windshield with thedefroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.

● Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concen-trate and water.

LIC1061

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH



To defrost the rear window glass and outsidemirrors (if so equipped), start the engine andpush the rear window defroster switch on. Therear window defroster indicator light on theswitch comes on. Push the switch again to turnthe defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns offafter approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch or dam-age the rear window defroster.

NOTE:

The top and bottom few rows of wires onthe rear window are not part of the rearwindow defroster system. These wiresmake up the antenna for the audio system.

Type ALIC1218

Type BWIC1475

Type CWIC1460

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR (if so equipped)DEFROSTER SWITCH



XENON HEADLIGHTS (if soequipped)

WARNING

cHIGH VOLTAGE

● When xenon headlights are on, theyproduce a high voltage. To prevent anelectric shock, never attempt to modifyor disassemble. Always have your xe-non headlights replaced at a NISSANdealer.

● Xenon headlights provide considerablymore light than conventional head-lights. If they are not correctly aimed,they might temporarily blind an oncom-ing driver or the driver ahead of you andcause a serious accident. If headlightsare not aimed correctly, immediatelytake your vehicle to a NISSAN dealerand have the headlights adjustedcorrectly.

When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, itsbrightness or color varies slightly. However, thecolor and brightness will soon stabilize.

● The life of xenon headlights will beshortened by frequent on-off opera-tion. It is generally desirable not to turnoff the headlights for short intervals(for example, when the vehicle stops ata traffic signal). Even when the daytimerunning lights are active (Canada only),the xenon headlights do not turn on.This way the life of the xenon head-lights is not reduced.

● If the xenon headlight bulb is close toburning out, the brightness will drasti-cally decrease, the light will start blink-ing, or the color of the light will be-come reddish. If one or more of theabove signs appear, contact a NISSANdealer. HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

s1 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the front parking, tail, license plate andinstrument panel lights come on.

s2 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the headlights come on and all the otherlights remain on.

Type ALIC1085

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH



CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

Autolight system (if so equipped)The autolight system allows the headlights to beset so they turn on and off automatically. Theautolight system can:

● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,license plate and instrument panel lights au-tomatically when it is dark.

● Turn off all the lights when it is light.

● Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds afteryou place the ignition switch in the OFFposition and all doors are closed.

Type BLIC1064

Type CLIC1063 LIC1086



To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-tion s1 .

2. Push the push-button ignition switch to theON position.

3. The autolight system automatically turns theheadlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition and a door is opened and left open, theheadlights remain ON for 5 minutes. If anotherdoor is opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5minute timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to

the OFF, , or position. Be sure you do not put anything on top ofthe autolight sensor located on the top sideof the instrument panel. The autolight sen-sor controls the autolight; if it is covered,the autolight sensor reacts as if it is darkout and the headlights will illuminate. Ifthis occurs while parked with the engineoff and the ignition switch placed in the ONposition, your vehicle’s battery could be-come discharged.

Headlight beam select

s1 To select the high beam function, push thelever forward. The high beam lights come onand the light illuminates.

s2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

s3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes theheadlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver systemIf the ignition switch is placed in the OFF positionwhile the headlight switch is in theor position, the headlights will turn off after5 minutes.

LIC1068 LIC1087



CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-tomatically turns off the headlights after aperiod of time, you should turn the head-light switch to the OFF position when theengine is not running to avoid dischargingthe vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-duced intensity when the engine is started withthe parking brake released. The daytime runninglights operate with the headlight switch in theOFF position or in the position. Turn theheadlight switch to the position for fullillumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine isstarted, the daytime running lights do not illumi-nate. The daytime running lights illuminate whenthe parking brake is released. The daytime run-ning lights will remain on until the ignition switchis placed in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are noton. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLThe instrument cluster illuminates when the igni-tion switch is placed in the ON position.

The instrument brightness control operates whenthe headlight control switch is in the

AUTO, or position.

Turn the control left or right to adjust the bright-ness of the instrument panel lights when drivingat night.

LIC1066



TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

s1 Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

s2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up ordown to the point where the indicator lightbegins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switchto the position, then turn the fog lightswitch to the position.To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switchin the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head-lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch tothe position.To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switchto the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beamsselected for the fog lights to operate. The foglights automatically turn off when the high beamheadlights are selected.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergency condi-tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

● If stopping for an emergency, be sure tomove the vehicle well off the road.

● Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unlessunusual circumstances force you todrive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

● Turn signals do not work when the haz-ard warning flasher lights are on.

LIC1088 LIC1089 LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSWITCH



The flashers will operate with the ignition switchplaced in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

To sound the horn, push the center pad area ofthe steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the supplemental front air bagsystem may result in serious personalinjury.

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters (ifso equipped). The switches are located on thecenter console.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the low or high position of the switch, asdesired, depending on the temperature. Theindicator light in the switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on and off.The indicator light will remain on as long asthe switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you leavethe vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.

LIC1069 LIC1041

HORN HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)



CAUTION

● Do not use the seat heater for extendedperiods or when no one is using theseat.

● Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seatmay become overheated.

● Do not place anything hard or heavy onthe seat or pierce it with a pin or similarobject. This may result in damage to theheater.

● Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately with adry cloth.

● When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-lar materials.

● If any abnormalities are found or theheated seat does not operate, turn theswitch off and have the system checkedby your NISSAN dealer.

● The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.

The vehicle should be driven with the Traction Con-trol System (TCS) on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the TCSreduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin.The engine speed will be reduced even if theaccelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximumengine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,turn the TCS off.

To turn off the TCS, push the TCS OFF switch.The indicator will come on.

Push the TCS OFF switch again or restart theengine to turn ON the system. See “TractionControl System (TCS) (if so equipped)” in the“Starting and driving” section.

The vehicle should be driven with the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-ing conditions.If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDCsystem reduces the engine output to reducewheel spin. The engine speed will be reducedeven if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. Ifmaximum engine power is needed to free a stuckvehicle, turn the VDC system off.To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFFswitch. The indicator will come on.Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart theengine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dy-namic Control (VDC) system (if so equipped)” inthe “Starting and driving” section.

LIC0451 WIC0534

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)



The power outlets are for powering electricalaccessories such as cellular telephones. Theyare rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum. Theconsole outlet is powered directly by the vehi-cle’s battery.

CAUTION

● The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

● Only certain power outlets are designedfor use with a cigarette lighter unit. Donot use any other power outlet for anaccessory lighter. See your NISSANdealer for additional information.

● Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

● Use power outlets with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

● Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner, headlights or rear windowdefroster is on.

● Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may open.

● When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water to contact theoutlet.

Instrument panel Type A (if so equipped)LIC1070

Instrument panel Type B (if so equipped)LIC1071

POWER OUTLET



Open the lower half of the console box to accessthe power outlet. Refer to “Console box” in thissection.

MAP POCKETS SEATBACK POCKETS (if soequipped)The seatback pockets are located on the back ofthe driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pocketscan be used to store maps.

Console boxWIC1262 WIC1263 LIC0016

STORAGE



STORAGE POUCH (if so equipped)A storage pouch is located on the front of thedriver’s and passenger’s seats.

WARNING

Do not store angular, sharp, heavy objectsor objects that cannot fully fit inside thepouch because they might increase thelikelihood of an injury in a crash.

SUNGLASSES HOLDERTo open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed whiledriving to prevent an accident.

CAUTION

● Do not use for anything other thansunglasses.

● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking in directsunlight. The heat may damage thesunglasses.

LIC1242 LIC1074



Front - Type ALIC1075

Front - Type BLIC1105

Rear (sedan)WRS0167



CUP HOLDERS

To open the front cup holders, push the cupholder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid andpush down until it clicks in place.

The plastic insert (if so equipped) may be re-moved to accommodate a larger cup size or forcleaning.

The rear center cup holders are located in therear fold-down armrest (sedan) or in the rear armrest (coupe).

CAUTION

● Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

Soft bottle holder

CAUTION

● Do not use bottle holder for any otherobjects that could be thrown about inthe vehicle and possibly injure peopleduring sudden braking or an accident.

● Do not use bottle holder for open liquidcontainers.

Rear (coupe)LIC1219

Soft bottle holderWIC1216



GLOVE BOXOpen the glove box by pulling the handle. Use themaster key when locking s1 or unlocking s2 theglove box.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

Upper halfPull up on the driver’s side latch to open theupper half of the console box. The mat (if soequipped) may be removed for cleaning.

The upper half of the console box may be used forstorage of cellular phones. An access hole isprovided at the front of the upper half of theconsole box for phone cord routing to the poweroutlet.

Lower halfPull up on the passenger’s side latch to open thelower half of the console box. A power outlet islocated inside the console box. The mat (if soequipped) may be removed for cleaning.

WIC1076 WIC1120 WIC1121



STORAGE BOX (if so equipped)COVERED STORAGE BOXPush the center of the lid to open.

LIC1477Type A

LIC1090

Type BLIC1078



GROCERY HOOKS (if so equipped)The grocery hooks are located in the trunk andcan be used to hang a standard size plasticgrocery bag.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 20lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.

CARGO NET (if so equipped)

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision, un-secured cargo could cause personalinjury.

The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargoarea from moving around while the vehicle is inmotion.

To install the cargo net, attach the net to theretainers.

To remove the cargo net, detach the net from thecargo net retainers.

LIC0748 WIC1264 LIC0802



POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehicle whileit is in motion and before closing thewindows. Use the window lock switchto prevent unexpected use of the powerwindows.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in a window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents.

The power windows operate when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position, or for about45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed inthe OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’sdoor is opened during this period of about 45seconds, power to the windows is canceled.

1. Window lock button2. Power door lock switch3. Front passenger side (automatic switch,

if so equipped)4. Right rear passenger side (sedan only)5. Left rear passenger side (sedan only)6. Driver side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switchThe driver’s side control panel is equipped withswitches to open or close all of the windows.

To open a window, push the switch to the firstdetent and continue to hold down until the de-sired window position is reached. To close awindow, pull the switch to the first detent andcontinue to hold down until the desired windowposition is reached.

WIC1124

WINDOWS



Front passenger’s power windowswitchThe passenger’s window switch operates onlythe corresponding passenger’s window. To openthe window, push the switch to the first detentand continue to hold it down until the desiredwindow position is reached s1 . To close thewindow, pull the switch to the first detent andcontinue to hold it up until the desired windowposition is reached s2 .

Rear power window switch (sedanonly)The rear power window switches open or closeonly the corresponding windows. To open thewindow, push the switch and hold it down s1 . Toclose the window, pull the switch up s2 .

Locking passengers’ windowsWhen the window lock button is depressed, onlythe driver’s side window can be opened orclosed. Push it again to cancel the window lockfunction.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automaticoperation, press the window switch down (onlydriver’s side shown) to the second detent andrelease it; it need not be held. The window auto-matically opens all the way. To stop the window,lift the switch up while the window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automaticoperation, pull the switch up to the second detentand release it; it need not be held. To stop thewindow, press the switch down while the windowis closing.

WIC1265 LIC0718 LIC0410



Auto-reverse functionIf the control unit detects something caught in thewindow as it is closing, the window will be imme-diately lowered.

The auto-reverse function can be activated whenthe window is closed by automatic operationwhen the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition or for 45 seconds after the ignitionswitch is placed in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the window oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the window.

When power window switch does notoperateIf the power window automatic function (closingonly) does not operate properly, perform the fol-lowing procedure to initialize the power windowsystem:


2. Open the window more than halfway byoperating the power window switch.

3. Pull the power window switch and hold it toclose the window, and then hold the switchmore than 3 seconds after the window isclosed.

4. Release the power window switch. Operatethe window by the automatic function toconfirm the initialization is complete. Thepower window automatically opens orcloses depending on if the automatic downor up function is selected.

5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for otherwindows.

If the power window function does not operateproperly after performing the above procedure,see a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

AUTOMATIC MOONROOF

The moonroof will only operate when the ignitionswitch is placed in the ON position. The auto-matic moonroof is operational for about 45 sec-onds, even if the ignition switch is placed in theACC or OFF position. If the driver’s door or thefront passenger’s door is opened during thisperiod of about 45 seconds, power to the moon-roof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open the moonroof, push the switchtoward s1 .

LIC1351

MOONROOF (if so equipped)



To fully close the moonroof, push the switchtoward s2 .

To open or close the moonroof part way, push theswitch in any direction while the moonroof issliding to stop it in the desired position.

Tilting the moonroof

Close the moonroof by pushing the switchtoward s2 . Release the switch, then pushthe switch toward s2 again to tilt themoonroof up.

To tilt the moonroof down, push the switchtoward s1 .

WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open moonroof.Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe moonroof opening while the vehicleis in motion or while the moonroof isclosing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the moonroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on themoonroof or surrounding area.

Resetting the moonroof switch

The moonroof switch may not operate properlyand need to be reset if any of the followingconditions have occurred:

● the moonroof has been manually moved,

● the moonroof motor has been removed andreinstalled after the moonroof has been re-positioned or adjusted,

● the moonroof glass panel has been adjustedor changed, or

● the electrical supply interrupted and/orsome malfunction has been detected.

Use the following reset procedure to return themoonroof operation to normal.


2. Push and hold the moonroof switchtoward s2 . Once the moonroof hasreached the full tilt position, release theswitch. Push and hold the switch toward

the s2 position again. After a delay offour seconds, the moonroof will make a smallmovement and backup.

3. Release the switch.

4. Within 5 seconds of releasing the switch,push and continuously hold the switchtoward s2 . The moonroof will movefrom the tilt position to the open position andback to the close position.

NOTE:

If the switch is released at any time duringStep 4, the procedure must be restarted.

5. Release the switch. Do not place the ignitionswitch in the OFF position for at least 2seconds. The moonroof is now reset.

If the moonroof still does not operate properly,have the moonroof system checked by a NISSANdealer.

Auto-reverse function (when closing ortilting down the moonroof)The auto-reverse function can be activated whenthe moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-matic operation when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position or for about 45 sec-onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition.



Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the moonroofoccurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the moonroof.

When closing:

If the control unit detects something caught in themoonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroofwill immediately open backward.

When tilting down:

If the control unit detects something caught in themoonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-mediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keeppushing the tilt down switch within 5 secondsafter it happens; the moonroof will fully closegradually. Make sure nothing is caught in themoonroof.

WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open moonroof.Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe moonroof opening while the vehicleis in motion or while the moonroof isclosing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the moonroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on themoonroof or surrounding area.

SunshadeOpen and close the sunshade by sliding it for-ward or backward.

If the moonroof does not closeHave your NISSAN dealer check and repair themoonroof.

The interior light has a three-position switch andoperates regardless of ignition switch position.

● When the switch is in the ON position s1 ,the interior light illuminates, regardless ofdoor position. The light will go off after 30minutes unless the ignition switch is placedin the ACC or ON position.

● When the switch is in the center DOORposition s2 , the front and rear personallights will illuminate when the driver’s door isopened. Lights remain on for a maximum of30 seconds after driver’s door is closed.

Type ALIC1081

INTERIOR LIGHT



The lights will go off when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position, or the driver’s door isclosed and locked.

The lights will also go off after 30 minutes whenthe doors are open.

● When the switch is in the OFF position s3 ,the interior light does not illuminate, regard-less of door position.

NOTE:

The doorstep lights illuminate when thedriver and passenger doors are opened re-gardless of the interior light switch posi-tion. These lights will turn off automaticallyafter 30 minutes while doors are open toprevent the battery from becoming dis-charged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)The console light will turn on whenever the park-ing lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be adjustedwith the instrument brightness control.

Type BWIC1267 WIC1476



To turn the map lights on, press the light lens. Toturn them off, press the lens again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

To turn the rear map lights on, press the switch.To turn them off, press the switch again.

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.

The light will go off after about 30 minutes if thetrunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch isplaced in the ACC or ON position.

For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte-rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Front map lightsLIC1080

Rear map lights (sedan only)LIC1083

MAP LIGHTS TRUNK LIGHT



The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver provides aconvenient way to consolidate the functions of upto three individual hand-held transmitters intoone built-in device.

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver:

● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)devices such as garage doors, gates, homeand office lighting, entry door locks and se-curity systems.

● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. Noseparate batteries are required. If the vehi-cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-nected, HomeLinkT will retain all program-ming.

Once the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiveris programmed, retain the original trans-mitter for future programming procedures(Example: new vehicle purchases). Uponsale of the vehicle, the programmedHomeLinkT Universal Transceiver buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. Foradditional information, refer to “Program-ming HomeLinkT” later in this section.

WARNING

● Do not use the HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver with any garage dooropener that lacks safety stop and re-verse features as required by federalsafety standards. (These standards be-came effective for opener modelsmanufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-rage door opener which cannot detectan object in the path of a closing garagedoor and then automatically stop andreverse, does not meet current federalsafety standards. Using a garage dooropener without these features in-creases the risk of serious injury ordeath.

● During the programming procedureyour garage door or security gate willopen and close (if the transmitter iswithin range). Make sure that people orobjects are clear of the garage door,gate, etc. that you are programming.

● Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while programming the HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT

1. To begin, press and hold the two outerHomeLinkT buttons (to clear the memory)until the indicator light s1 blinks (after 20seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLinkT surface.

WIC0986

HOMELINKT UNIVERSALTRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)



3. Using both hands, simultaneously press andhold both the HomeLinkT button you want toprogram and the hand-held transmitter but-ton.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 hasbeen completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicatorlight on the HomeLinkT flashes, changingfrom a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashingblink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.When the indicator light flashes rapidly, bothbuttons may be released. The rapidly flash-ing light indicates successful programming.To activate the garage door or other pro-

grammed device, press and hold the pro-grammed HomeLinkT button — releasingwhen the device begins to activate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkT blinksrapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,HomeLinkT has picked up a “rolling code”garage door opener signal. You will need toproceed with the next steps to train theHomeLinkT to complete the programmingwhich may require a ladder and another per-son for convenience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-gram button located on the garage dooropener’s motor to activate the “trainingmode”. This button is usually located nearthe antenna wire that hangs down from themotor. If the wire originates from under alight lens, you will need to remove the lens toaccess the program button.

NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released theprogram button on the garage door open-er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, youhave 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.Use the help of a second person for conve-nience to assist when performing this step.

7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-ing the garage door opener’s program but-

ton, quickly and firmly press and release theHomeLinkT button you’ve just programmed.Press and release the HomeLinkT button upto 3 times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLinkT button should now be pro-grammed. (To program the remainingHomeLinkT buttons for additional door orgate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to“clear” all previously programmedHomeLinkT buttons.

If you have any questions or are having difficultyprogramming your HomeLinkT buttons, refer tothe HomeLinkT web site at: www.homelink.comor call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERSPrior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-onds. To program your hand-held transmitter toHomeLinkT, continue to press and hold theHomeLinkT button (see steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-gramming HomeLinkT”) while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly(indicating successful programming).

WIC0987



NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-sible damage to the garage door openercomponents.

OPERATING THE HOMELINKTUNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVERThe HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver (once pro-grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-propriate programmed HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver button. The red indicator light willilluminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSISIf the HomeLinkT does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:

● replace the hand-held transmitter batterieswith new batteries.

● position the hand-held transmitter with itsbattery area facing away from theHomeLinkT surface.

● press and hold both the HomeLinkT andhand-held transmitter buttons without inter-ruption.

● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLinkT surface. Hold the transmitter inthat position for up to 15 seconds. IfHomeLinkT is not programmed within thattime, try holding the transmitter in anotherposition – keeping the indicator light in viewat all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,please contact the NISSAN Consumer AffairsDepartment. The phone numbers are located inthe Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,to clear all programming, press and hold the twooutside buttons and release when the indicatorlight begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

ROLLING CODE PROGRAMMING

Rolling code garage door openers (or other roll-ing code devices) which are “code protected”and manufactured after 1996, may be deter-mined by the following:

● Reference the garage door opener Owner’sManual for verification.

● The hand-held transmitter appears to pro-gram the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiverbut does not activate the garage door.

● Press and hold the trained HomeLinkT but-ton. If the garage door opener has the rollingcode feature, the HomeLinkT indicator lightwill flash rapidly, then remain on after 2 sec-onds.

To program the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiverto a garage door opener with the rolling codefeature, follow these instructions after completingthe “Programming HomeLinkT” (the aid of a sec-ond person may make the following proceduresquicker and easier).

1. Locate the training button on the garagedoor opener motor unit. Exact location andcolor of the button may vary by garage dooropener brand. If there is difficulty locatingthe training button, reference the garagedoor opener Owner’s Manual.

2. Press the training button on the garage dooropener motor unit (which may activate atraining light).



NOTE:

Following step 2, there are 30 seconds inwhich to initiate step 3.

3. Firmly press and release the programmedHomeLinkT button a second time to com-plete the training process. (Some garagedoor openers may require you to do thisprocedure a third time to complete the train-ing.)

The garage door opener should now recognizethe HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver and acti-vate when the HomeLinkT button is pressed. Theremaining two buttons may now be programmed(if not yet programmed, follow steps 2 through 4in the “Programming HomeLinkT” proceduresearlier in this section).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHOMELINKT BUTTONTo reprogram a HomeLinkT Universal Transceiverbutton, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkT but-ton. Do not release the button until step 4has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76mm) away from the HomeLinkT surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitterbutton.

4. The HomeLinkT indicator light will flash, firstslowly and then rapidly. When the indicatorlight begins to flash rapidly, release bothbuttons.

The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver button hasnow been reprogrammed. The new device canbe activated by pushing the HomeLinkT buttonthat was just programmed. This procedure willnot affect any other programmed HomeLinkTbuttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change thecodes of any non-rolling code device that hasbeen programmed into HomeLinkT. Consult theOwner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-facturer or dealer of those devices for additionalinformation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLinkT Univer-sal Transceiver with your new transmitterinformation.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part 15and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-tion is subject to the following two condi-tions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference and (2) This device must acceptany interference that may be received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation.

This transmitter has been tested and com-plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D. CV2V67690



3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Child safety rear door lock (Sedan only) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ With Door and TrunkRequest Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9NISSAN Intelligent Key™operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9How to use the remote keyless entryfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ Without Door and TrunkRequest Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

How to use the remote keyless entryfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25

Tilting/telescopic steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Telescopic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29


1. Two Intelligent Keys2. Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent

Keys)3. Key number plate

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™Your vehicle can only be driven with the IntelligentKey which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelli-gent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Im-mobilizer System components.


As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-tered and used with one vehicle. The new keysmust be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior touse with the Intelligent Key and NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System of your vehicle. Since theregistration process requires erasing all memoryin the Intelligent Key components when register-ing new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keysthat you have to the NISSAN dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.Record the key number and keep it in a safe place(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you loseyour keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates byusing the key number. NISSAN does not recordkey numbers so it is very important to keep trackof your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you havelost all keys and do not have one to duplicatefrom. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealercan duplicate it.

CAUTION

● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, whichcontains electrical components, tocome into contact with water or saltwater. This could affect the systemfunction.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharplyagainst another object.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in an area where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with akey holder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key nearequipment that produces a magneticfield, such as a TV, audio equipment andpersonal computers.

WPD0363

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lockknob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it intothe Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns tothe lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock thedoors, trunk lid, glove box and rear seatback lock.

See “Doors” and “Trunk lid” later in this section,“Storage” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-tion and “Seats” in the “Safety — Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system” section.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installedin the Intelligent Key slot.

Valet hand-offWhen you have to leave a key with a valet, givethem the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me-chanical key with you to protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box and the trunk from beingopened during valet hand-off, follow the proce-dures below:

1. Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFFposition.

2. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-gent Key.

3. Lock the glove box and the rear seats withthe mechanical key.

4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet andkeep the mechanical key with you.

See “Trunk lid” later in this section, “Storage” inthe “Instruments and controls” section and“Seats” in the “Safety — seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYSYou can only drive your vehicle using the masterkeys which are registered to the NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System components in your vehicle.

The master key can be used for all the locks.


Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-cate your existing key. This is because the regis-tration process will erase the memory of all keycodes previously registered into the NISSAN Ve-hicle Immobilizer System.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, whichcontains an electrical transponder, to come intocontact with salt water. This could affect systemfunction.

SPA1951

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3


WARNING

● Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seat belts,this provides greater safety in the eventof an accident by helping to preventpersons from being thrown from thevehicle. This also helps keep childrenand others from unintentionally open-ing the doors, and will help keep outintruders.

● Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.


LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front s1 of the vehiclelocks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear s2 of thevehicle unlocks that door. From that position,returning the key to neutral s3 (where the key canonly be removed and inserted) and turning ittoward the rear again within five seconds unlocksall doors s4 .

Opening and closing windows (if soequipped)The driver’s door key operation allows you toopen and close windows equipped with auto-matic operation at the same time.

● To open the windows, turn the door keytoward the rear of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is unlocked.

Driver’s sideLPD0181

DOORS



LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOBTo lock the door without the key, move the insidelock knob to the lock position s1 , then close thedoor.

To unlock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the unlock position s2 .

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the doorlock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) tothe lock position s1 . When locking the door thisway, be certain not to leave the key inside thevehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’sside) to the unlock position s2 .

Lockout protectionWhen the power door lock switch (driver’s orfront passenger’s side) is moved to the lockposition with the Intelligent Key in the port andany door open, all doors will lock and unlockautomatically. With the Intelligent Key left in thevehicle (not in the Intelligent Key port) and anydoor open, all doors will unlock automatically anda chime will sound after the door is closed.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS● All doors will be locked automatically when

the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

● All the doors will unlock automatically whenthe ignition switch is placed in the OFFposition.

The automatic lock and unlock functionscan be deactivated or activated indepen-dently of each other. To deactivate or activatethe automatic door lock or unlock system, per-form the following procedure:

1. Close all doors.


Inside lockWPD0291

Door lock switchWPD0381



3. Do one of the following within 20 seconds ofperforming Step #2:

● To change AUTO UNLOCK settings:push and hold the power door lock switchto the position (UNLOCK) for morethan 5 seconds.

● To change AUTO LOCK settings: pushand hold the power door lock switch tothe position (LOCK) for morethan 5 seconds.

4. When activated, the hazard indicator willflash twice. When deactivated, the hazardindicator will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in theOFF and ON position again between eachsetting change.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK(Sedan only)

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doorsfrom being opened accidentally, especially whensmall children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on theedge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the unlock position s1 , thedoor can be opened from the outside or theinside.

When the lever is in the lock position s2 ,the door can be opened only from the out-side.

WARNING

● Radio waves could adversely affectelectric medical equipment. Those whouse a pacemaker should contact theelectric medical equipment manufac-turer for the possible influences beforeuse.

● The Intelligent Key transmits radiowaves when the buttons are pushed.The FAA advises the radio waves mayaffect aircraft navigation and communi-cation systems. Do not operate the In-telligent Key while on an airplane. Makesure the buttons are not operated unin-tentionally when the unit is stored for aflight.

The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locksusing the remote controller function or pushingthe request switch on the vehicle without takingthe key out from a pocket or purse. The operatingenvironment and/or conditions may affect theIntelligent Key operation.

Be sure to read the following before using theIntelligent Key.

LIC0716

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ WITHDOOR AND TRUNK REQUESTSWITCHES



CAUTION

● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou when operating the vehicle.

● Never leave the Intelligent Key in thevehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating withthe vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-mental conditions may interfere with the opera-tion of the Intelligent Key under the followingoperating conditions:

● When operating near a location wherestrong radio waves are transmitted, such asa TV tower, power station and broadcastingstation.

● When in possession of wireless equipment,such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,and CB radio.

● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with orcovered by metallic materials.

● When any type of radio wave remote controlis used nearby.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed near anelectric appliance such as a personal com-puter.

● When the vehicle is parked near a parkingmeter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditionsbefore using the Intelligent Key function or usethe mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies dependingon the operating conditions, the battery’s life isapproximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-charged, insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelli-gent Key port to start the engine. Replace thedischarged battery with a new one as soon aspossible. For more details, see “Push-button ig-nition switch” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receivingradio waves, if the key is left near equipmentwhich transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-tery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a bat-tery, see “Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

Because the steering wheel is locked electrically,unlocking the steering wheel with the ignitionswitch in the LOCK position is impossible whenthe vehicle battery is completely discharged. Un-

locking the steering wheel is impossible even ifthe Intelligent Key is inserted into the IntelligentKey port. Pay special attention that the vehiclebattery is not completely discharged.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registeredand used with one vehicle. For information aboutthe purchase and use of additional IntelligentKeys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION




● Do not change or modify the IntelligentKey.

● Wetting may damage the IntelligentKey. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-mediately wipe until it is completely dry.






If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSANrecommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent theunauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operatethe vehicle. For information regarding the erasingprocedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be usedwhen the Intelligent Key is within the specifiedoperating range from the request switch s1 .

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged orstrong radio waves are present near the operat-ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-ing range becomes narrower, and the IntelligentKey may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)from each request switch s1 .

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,handle or rear bumper, the request switches maynot function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operatingrange, it is possible for anyone, even someonewho does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push therequest switch to lock/unlock the doors.

Coupe shown Sedan similarWPD0465



DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKSPRECAUTION

● Do not push the door handle request switchwith the Intelligent Key held in your hand asillustrated. The close distance to the doorhandle will cause the Intelligent Key systemto have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-gent Key is outside the vehicle.

● After locking with the door handle requestswitch, verify the doors are securely lockedby testing them.

● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being leftinside the vehicle, make sure you carry thekey with you and then lock the doors.

● Do not pull the door handle before pushingthe door handle request switch. The doorwill be unlocked but will not open. Releasethe door handle once and pull it again toopen the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENTKEY™OPERATIONYou can lock or unlock the doors without takingthe key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, youcan lock or unlock all doors by pushing the doorhandle request switch within the range of opera-tion.

WPD0375Coupe shown, Sedan similar

WPD0432



Locking doors

1. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) posi-tion, push the ignition switch to the LOCKposition and make sure you carry the Intelli-gent Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch s1while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the trunk will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice andthe outside buzzer sounds twice.

NOTE:

● Doors lock with the door handle requestswitch while the ignition switch is not in theLOCK position.

● Doors do not lock by pushing the doorhandle request switch while any door isopen. However, doors lock with the me-chanical key even if any door is open.

● Doors do not lock with the door handlerequest switch with the Intelligent Key insidethe vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.However, when an Intelligent Key is insidethe vehicle, doors can be locked with an-other Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

● After locking the doors using the re-quest switch, make sure that the doorshave been securely locked by operatingthe door handle or the trunk openerswitch.

● When locking the doors using the re-quest switch, make sure to have theIntelligent Key in your possession be-fore operating the request switch toprevent the Intelligent Key from beingleft in the vehicle.

● The request switch is operational onlywhen the Intelligent Key has been de-tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protectionis equipped with the Intelligent Key.

When the driver’s side door is open, the doorsare locked, and then the Intelligent Key is putinside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;the lock will automatically unlock and the doorbuzzer sounds.

Coupe shown, Sedan similarWPD0433 WPD0369



NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli-gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-ating the request switch to lock the door.Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket oryour other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not functionunder the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is placed ontop of the instrument panel.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed ontop of the rear parcel shelf.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side the glove box or a storage bin.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side the door pockets.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed on orunder the spare tire area.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side or near metallic materials.

Unlocking doors1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch s1 .

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and theoutside buzzer sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch s1again within 5 seconds to unlock all doors.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking thedoors, that door may not be unlocked. Returningthe door handle to its original position will unlockthe door. If the door does not unlock after return-ing the door handle, push the door handle re-quest switch to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically unless oneof the following operations is performed within 1minute after pushing the request switch.

● Opening any door.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

Coupe shown, Sedan similarWPD0432 WPD0369



The interior light timer illuminates for 30 secondswhen a door is unlocked and the room lightswitch is in the DOOR position.

The interior light can be turned off without waitingfor 30 seconds by performing one of the follow-ing operations.

● Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-tion.

● Locking the doors with the remote controller.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFFposition.

Opening the trunk lid

1. Push the trunk opener request switch sA formore than 1 second while carrying the Intel-ligent Key with you.

2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will soundfour times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection isequipped with the Intelligent Key.

When all doors are locked and the trunk lid isclosed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk,the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk willopen.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTEKEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTIONThe remote keyless entry function can operate alldoor locks using the remote keyless function ofthe Intelligent Key. The remote keyless functioncan operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) awayfrom the vehicle. The operating distance de-pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not func-tion under the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is not within theoperational range.

● When the doors or the trunk are open or notclosed securely.

● When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure not to leave the key inthe vehicle.

WPD0406



Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push the button on the IntelligentKey.

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice andthe horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure that the doors have beensecurely locked by operating the doorhandles.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the button on the Intelligent Key.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Push the button again within five sec-onds to unlock all doors.

All doors will be locked automatically unless oneof the following operations is performed withinone minute after pushing the button:

● Opening any doors.


WPD0359 WPD0360



The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds whena door is unlocked and the room light switch is inthe DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting for 15seconds by performing one of the following op-erations:


● Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.


Opening windows (if so equipped)The Intelligent Key allows you to open windowsequipped with automatic operation simulta-neously.

● To open the windows, press the but-ton on the Intelligent Key longer than threeseconds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressingthe button on the Intelligent Key.

The door windows cannot be closed byusing the Intelligent Key.

Releasing the trunk lid

Push the button for longer than 0.5 sec-ond to open the trunk lid. The trunk release buttonwill not operate when the ignition switch is in theON position or when the trunk cancel switch is inthe OFF position. See “Cancel switch” in the“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pushing and holding the button on theIntelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25seconds.

WPD0364 WPD0361



The panic alarm stops when:

● it has run for 50 seconds, or

● any button is pushed on the Intelligent Key.

● pressing the request switch on the driver orpassenger door with the Intelligent Key inrange of the door handle.

Silencing the horn beep featureIf desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the Intelligent Key.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least two seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least two secondsonce more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING SIGNALSTo help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-pectedly by erroneous operation of the IntelligentKey or to help prevent the vehicle from beingstolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside andoutside the vehicle and a warning is displayed inthe instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning isdisplayed, be sure to check the vehicle and theIntelligent Key.

See the troubleshooting guide that follows and“Vehicle information display indicator lights andwarnings” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-tion.

WPD0362



TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEVerify the location of all Intelligent Keys that areprogrammed for the vehicle. If another IntelligentKey is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehiclesystem may respond differently than expected.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the ignition switch tostop the engine

The SHIFT P warning appears on the display and theinside warning chime sounds continuously.

The shift selector is not in the P (Park)position.

Shift the shift selector to the P (Park)position.

When opening the driver’s door to getout of the vehicle The inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACCposition.

Push the ignition switch to the OFFposition.

The Intelligent Key is in the IntelligentKey port.

Remove the Intelligent Key from theIntelligent Key port.

When closing the door after getting outof the vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on the display, the out-side chime sounds 3 times and the inside warning chimesounds for approximately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.


The NO KEY warning appears on the display and theoutside chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC posi-tion and the shift selector is not in the P(Park) position.

Move the shift selector to the P (Park)position and push the ignition switch tothe OFF position.

The shift “P” warning light appears on the display andthe outside chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the OFF posi-tion and the shift selector is not in the P(PARK) position.

Move the shift selector to the P (Park)position.

When closing the door with the insidelock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approximately 3 secondsand all the doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicleor trunk.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle requestswitch to lock the door The outside chime sounds for approximately 2 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicleor trunk.


A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

The door handle request switch ispushed before the door is closed.

Push the door handle request switchafter the door is closed.

When closing the trunk lid The outside chime sounds for approximately 10 secondsand the trunk lid opens. The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.



WARNING

● Radio waves could adversely affectelectric medical equipment. Those whouse a pacemaker should contact theelectric medical equipment manufac-turer for the possible influences beforeuse.

● The Intelligent Key transmits radiowaves when the buttons are pushed.The FAA advises the radio waves mayaffect aircraft navigation and communi-cation systems. Do not operate the In-telligent Key while on an airplane. Makesure the buttons are not operated unin-tentionally when the unit is stored for aflight.

The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locksusing the remote controller function. The operat-ing environment and/or conditions may affect theIntelligent Key operation.

Be sure to read the following before using theIntelligent Key.

CAUTION

● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou when operating the vehicle.

● Never leave the Intelligent Key in thevehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating withthe vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-mental conditions may interfere with the opera-tion of the Intelligent Key under the followingoperating conditions:

● When operating near a location wherestrong radio waves are transmitted, such asa TV tower, power station and broadcastingstation.

● When in possession of wireless equipment,such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,and CB radio.

● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with orcovered by metallic materials.

● When any type of radio wave remote controlis used nearby.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed near anelectric appliance such as a personal com-puter.

● When the vehicle is parked near a parkingmeter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditionsbefore using the Intelligent Key function or usethe mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies dependingon the operating conditions, the battery’s life isapproximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-charged, insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelli-gent Key port to start the engine. Replace thedischarged battery with a new one as soon aspossible. For more details, see “Push-button ig-nition switch” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receivingradio waves, if the key is left near equipmentwhich transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-tery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a bat-tery, see “Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

Because the steering wheel is locked electrically,unlocking the steering wheel with the ignitionswitch in the LOCK position is impossible whenthe vehicle battery is completely discharged. Un-locking the steering wheel is impossible even ifthe Intelligent Key is inserted into the Intelligent

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™WITHOUT DOOR AND TRUNKREQUEST SWITCHES



Key port. Pay special attention that the vehiclebattery is not completely discharged.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registeredand used with one vehicle. For information aboutthe purchase and use of additional IntelligentKeys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION




● Do not change or modify the IntelligentKey.

● Wetting may damage the IntelligentKey. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-mediately wipe until it is completely dry.




If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSANrecommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent theunauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operatethe vehicle. For information regarding the erasingprocedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

OPERATING RANGEThe Intelligent Key functions can only be usedwhen the Intelligent Key is within the specifiedoperating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged orstrong radio waves are present near the operat-ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-ing range becomes narrower, and the IntelligentKey may not function properly.

The operating range is within 33 ft (10 m) of thevehicle.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTEKEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTIONThe remote keyless entry function can operate alldoor locks using the remote keyless function ofthe Intelligent Key. The remote keyless functioncan operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) awayfrom the vehicle. The operating distance de-pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not func-tion under the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is not within theoperational range.

● When the doors or the trunk are open or notclosed securely.

● When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure not to leave the key inthe vehicle.



Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push the button on the IntelligentKey.

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice andthe horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure that the doors have beensecurely locked by operating the doorhandles.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the button on the Intelligent Key.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Push the button again within five sec-onds to unlock all doors.

All doors will be locked automatically unless oneof the following operations is performed withinone minute after pushing the button:

● Opening any doors.


WPD0359 WPD0360



The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds whena door is unlocked and the room light switch is inthe DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting for 15seconds by performing one of the following op-erations:


● Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.


Releasing the trunk lid

Push the button for longer than 0.5 sec-ond to open the trunk lid. The trunk release buttonwill not operate when the ignition switch is in theON position or when the trunk cancel switch is inthe OFF position. See “Cancel switch” in the“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pushing and holding the button on theIntelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25seconds.

WPD0364 WPD0361



The panic alarm stops when:

● it has run for 50 seconds, or

● any button is pushed on the Intelligent Key.

● pressing the request switch on the driver orpassenger door with the Intelligent Key inrange of the door handle.

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the Intelligent Key.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least two seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least two secondsonce more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING SIGNALSTo help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-pectedly by erroneous operation of the IntelligentKey or to help prevent the vehicle from beingstolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside andoutside the vehicle and a warning is displayed inthe instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning isdisplayed, be sure to check the vehicle and theIntelligent Key.

See the troubleshooting guide that follows and“Vehicle information display indicator lights andwarnings” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-tion.

WPD0362



TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEVerify the location of all Intelligent Keys that areprogrammed for the vehicle. If another IntelligentKey is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehiclesystem may respond differently than expected.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the ignition switch to stopthe Hybrid System

The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis-play and the inside warning chime soundscontinuously.

The shift selector is not in the P position.Shift the shift selector to the P position.

When opening the driver’s door to get outof the vehicle

The inside warning chime soundscontinuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position.Push the ignition switch to the OFFposition.

The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Keyport.

Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-gent Key port.

When closing the door after getting out ofthe vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on thedisplay, the outside chime sounds 3 timesand the inside warning chime sounds forapproximately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.


The NO KEY warning appears on the dis-play and the outside chime soundscontinuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC positionand the shift selector is not in the “P” (Park)position.

Move the shift selector to the “P” (Park)position and push the ignition switch to theOFF position.

When closing the door with the inside lockknob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approximately3 seconds and all the doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle ortrunk.


When closing the trunk lidThe outside chime sounds for approximately10 seconds and the trunk lid opens.

The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.Carry the Intelligent Key with you.



s1 Pull the hood lock release handle locatedbelow the driver’s side instrument panel; thehood springs up slightly.

s2 Lift the lever at the front of the hood with yourfingertips and raise the hood.

s3 Remove the support rod from the clamp.

s4 Insert the support rod into the hole on thepassenger’s side of the hood.

s5 When closing the hood, return the hood rodto its original position. Lower the hood ap-proximately 12 inches (30 cm) above thelatch and release it. This allows proper en-gagement of the hood latch.

WARNING

● Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving. Fail-ure to do so could cause the hood to flyopen and result in an accident.

● If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid injurydo not open the hood.

OPENER OPERATION

WARNING

● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

WPD0441 LPD0394

HOOD TRUNK LID




To open the trunk lid, push the opener lever down.

To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk liddown securely.

NOTE:

You can open the trunk lid with the Intelli-gent Key. Refer to “NISSAN IntelligentKey™” earlier in this section.

Cancel switch (if so equipped)When the switch, located inside the glove box, isin the OFF position, the power to the trunk lid willbe cancelled. The trunk can only be opened withthe master key or keyfob.

The trunk lid cannot be opened when:

● using the trunk lid release switch,

● the trunk open request switch is pressed,when the Intelligent Key is in range of thevehicle or

● the HOLD button on the Intelligent Key ispushed.

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they arearound cars to prevent them from playingand becoming locked in the trunk wherethey could be seriously injured. Keep thecar locked, with the rear seatback andtrunk lid securely latched when not in use,and prevent children’s access to car keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism providesa means of escape for children and adults in theevent they become locked inside the trunk.

LPD0395 LPD0396



To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-nated release handle until the lock releases andpush up on the trunk lid. The release handle ismade of a material that glows in the dark after abrief exposure to ambient light.

The handle is located inside the trunk compart-ment on the interior of the trunk lid.

OPENER OPERATIONThe fuel-filler door release is located on the floorto the left of the driver’s seat. To open the fuel-filler door, pull up the release. To lock, close thefuel-filler door securely.

FUEL-FILLER CAPThe fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn thecap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turnthe cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks areheard.

For the Coupe model, put the fuel-filler cap on thecap holder s1 while refueling.

For the Sedan model, loop the tether straparound the hook s1 while refueling.

LPD0397Coupe

LPD0448

FUEL-FILLER DOOR



WARNING

Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain conditions.You could be burned or seriously injured ifit is misused or mishandled. Always stopthe engine and do not smoke or allowopen flames or sparks near the vehiclewhen refueling.

● Fuel may be under pressure. Turn thecap a third of a turn, and wait for any“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuelfrom spraying out and possibly causingpersonal injury. Then remove the cap.

● Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. It could also cause themalfunction indicator light to come on.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

● Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portable fuelcontainers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you are fill-ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

● Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into thefuel-filler tube, then tighten until thefuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tightenthe fuel-filler cap properly may cause

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) to illuminate. If the light

illuminates because the fuel-filler capis loose or missing, tighten or install thecap and continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light

does not turn off after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see the“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and Controls” sectionearlier in this manual.

SedanLPD0449



TILT OPERATIONPull the lever s1 all the way toward you andadjust the steering wheel up or down in directions2 to the desired position. Lock the wheel byreleasing the lever and ensure that the lever hasreturned to its original position.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

TELESCOPIC OPERATIONPull the lever s1 all the way toward you andadjust the steering wheel forward or backward indirection s3 , to the desired position. Lock thewheel by releasing the lever and ensure that thelever has returned to its original position.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel anycloser to you than is necessary for propersteering operation and comfort. The driv-er’s air bag inflates with great force. If youare unrestrained, leaning forward, sittingsideways or out of position in any way, youare at greater risk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receive serious orfatal injuries from the air bag if you are upagainst it when it inflates. Always sit backagainst the seatback and as far away aspractical from the steering wheel. Alwaysuse the seat belts.

s1 To block glare from the front, swing down themain sun visor.

s2 To block glare from the side, remove the sunvisor from the center mount and swing thesun visor to the side.

LPD0398

Coupe shown, sedan similarWPD0435

TILTING/TELESCOPIC STEERINGCOLUMN

SUN VISORS



s3 Slide the extension sun visor (if so equipped)in or out as needed.

CAUTION

Do not store the sun visor before returningthe extension to its original position.

VANITY MIRRORSTo access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visordown and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanitymirrors are illuminated and turn on when themirror cover is open.

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)The night position s1 reduces glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position s2 when driving in daylighthours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

Coupe shown, sedan similarLPD0389 WPD0126

MIRRORS



AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLAREREARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-cally dims according to the intensity of the head-lights of the vehicle following you. The automaticanti-glare feature operates only when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

The indicator light s1 will illuminate when theautomatic anti-glare feature is operating.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, pressthe button. The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, pressthe button again. The indicator light willturn on.

For information on HomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver operation, see “HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver” in the “Instrument and controls” sec-tion of this manual.

For information on the compass and outside tem-perature display, see “Compass and outsidetemperature display” in the “Instrument and con-trols” section of this manual.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sensorss2 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of thesensors, resulting in improper operation.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

● Objects viewed in the outside mirror onthe passenger side are closer than theyappear. Be careful when moving to theright. Using only this mirror could causean accident. Use the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder to properlyjudge distances to other objects.

Electric control typeThe outside mirror remote control only operateswhen the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Rotate the control lever to select the right or leftmirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position bymoving the control lever.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-tional information, see “Rear window and outsidemirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the“Instrument and controls” section of this manual.

WPD0333 LPD0346



Manual folding outside mirrors (if soequipped)Push the mirrors backward to fold them.

WPD0056




MEMO

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voicerecognition systems

Control panel buttons (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Setting up the start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3How to use the SETUP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10Heater and air conditioner (manual)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18

Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Audio system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21

FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-22Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player. . . . . . 4-27FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43Steering wheel switch for audio control(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System withoutNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60


BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System withNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63Pairing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63Phone download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67Phone setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-68

Nissan Voice Recognition System (if so equipped) . . . 4-70Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System voicecommands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71Navigation system voice commands(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72Voice recognition settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74


WARNING

● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,fire, or electrical shock.

● Do not use this system if you notice anyabnormality, such as a frozen screen orlack of sound. Continued use of thesystem may result in accident, fire orelectric shock.

● In case you notice any foreign object inthe system hardware, spill liquid on it,or notice smoke or smell coming fromit, stop using the system immediatelyand contact your nearest NISSANdealer. Ignoring such conditions maylead to accidents, fire or electricalshock.

1. brightness control button(P. 4-7)

2. TILT button*3. INFO button*4. SETUP button (P. 4-3)5. MAP button*

6. DEST button*

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer tothe separate Navigation System Owner’sManual.

LHA0746

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS (if soequipped)

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems


When you use this system, make sure the engineis running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will use up all the battery power,and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

SETUP button — This is a button on the controlpanel.

“Display” key — This is a select key on the touch-screen. By touching this key you can proceed tothe next function.

SETTING UP THE START-UPSCREEN

With the ignition to ACC or ON, the SYSTEMSTART-UP warning is displayed on the screen.Read the warning and touch the “I agree” key(English) or the “Enter” (Français) key.

If you do not touch the “I agree” key, the Naviga-tion system will not proceed to the next stepdisplay.

If you do not press a button or touch a screen keyfor more than 1 minute on the START-UP screen,the screen will change to the audio screen auto-matically.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the separateNavigation System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO USE THE SETUP BUTTONWhen the SETUP button is pressed, the settingsscreen will appear on the display. You can selectand/or adjust several functions, features andmodes that are available for your vehicle. Touchone of the setting item keys to select each item tobe set.

LHA0747

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3


Display settingsTouch the “Display” key. The display screen willappear.

Display/brightness/contrast:

Touch the “–” key or the “+” key to adjust thebrightness and contrast of the screen.

The new settings are automatically saved whenyou exit the setting screen by touching the “Back”key or pressing any other mode button.

Display off:

Touch the Display “ON” key. The indicator of thedisplay turns off; touch the “Back” key to acceptthe change. The message above will be dis-played briefly. When the audio, or any modebutton on the control panel is operated, the dis-play turns on for that operation. If one of thecontrol panel buttons is pressed, the display willautomatically turn off after 5 seconds.

To turn the screen on,

● Press the SETUP button and then touch thedisplay “ON” key, or

● Press the button. The message “Re-suming display” will appear and the Display“ON” key will be automatically turned on, theamber indicator will illuminate.

LHA0748 LHA0749



ClockAdjusting the time:

The following display will appear when pressingthe SETUP button, then touching the “Clock”key.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is turned on, a clock is alwaysdisplayed in the upper right corner of the screen.This clock will indicate the time almost exactlybecause it is always adjusted by the GPS system.To turn off the clock in the upper right corner ofthe screen touch the On-screen Clock “ON” key,touch it again to display the clock.

Clock Format:

Touch the key or the key to chooseeither the 12-hour clock display or the 24-hourclock display.

Offset Adjust:

Touch the “–” key or the “+” key to adjust the timeby increasing or decreasing per minute.

Daylight Saving Time:

When this item is turned on, the daylight savingtime, application is enabled. To turn off daylightsaving time, touch the Daylight Saving Time “ON”key; touch it again to enable daylight saving.

Time Zone:

Touch the “Time Zone”key, the Time Zone screenwill appear.

Select one of the following zones, depending onthe current location. Touch the “ON” key for theparticular time zone.

● Pacific zone

● Mountain zone

● Central zone

● Eastern zone

● Atlantic zone

● Newfoundland zone

LHA0750 LHA1005



After selection, touch the “Back” key the Clockscreen will appear.

Pacific zone has been set as the initial (default)setting.

Beep settingTouch the “Volumes/Tones” key. Touch the But-ton Beeps “ON”key to turn on or turn off the beepsound. To accept the changes touch the “Back”key.

With this option on, a beep will sound if anybutton is pressed or any key is touched. Theamber indicator will be illuminated.

Language/unitsThe following display will appear when pressingthe SETUP button, then touching the “Language/Units” key.

LHA1006 LHA0751



Select Language:

Touch the “Select Language” key. From the fol-lowing display, select the English “ON” key or theFrançais “ON” key for your language preference.

Select Units:

Touch the “Select Units” key. From the followingdisplay, select the US “ON” key or the Metric“ON” key for your units preference.

Unit: US — mile, °F, MPGMetric: — km, °C, L/100 km

The settings are automatically saved when youexit the menu by touching the “Back” key.

Phone settings

For information on the phone settings, see“BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System withNavigation (if so equipped)” later in this section.

Voice recognition settingsFor information on the voice recognition settings,see “Voice Recognition System (if so equipped)”later in this section.

Audio settingsFor information on the audio settings, see “AudioSystem” later in this section.

Navigation settingsRefer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding these set-tings.

BUTTON

To change the display brightness, pressthe button. Pressing the button again willchange the display to the day or thenight display. Then, adjust the brightness

by touching the key or the key.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, thedisplay will return to the previous display.

LHA1007 LHA1008



When the shift selector is shifted into the R(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows theview directly to the rear of the vehicle.

WARNING

● The system is designed as an aid to thedriver in detecting large stationary ob-jects to help avoid damaging the ve-hicle. The system will not detect smallobjects below the bumper, and may notdetect objects close to the bumper oron the ground.

● The RearView Monitor is a conveniencebut it is not a substitute for proper back-ing. Always turn and check that it is safeto do so before backing up. Alwaysback up slowly.

● Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-tor differ from actual distance becausea wide-angle lens is used.

● Make sure that the trunk is securelyclosed when backing up.

● Do not put anything on the rearviewcamera. The rearview camera is in-stalled beside the license plate light.

● When washing the vehicle with high-pressure water, be sure not to spray itaround the camera. Otherwise, watermay enter the camera unit causing wa-ter condensation on the lens, a mal-function, fire or an electric shock.

● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-function or cause damage resulting in afire or an electric shock.

CAUTION

There is a plastic cover over the camera.Do not scratch the cover when cleaningdirt or snow from the cover.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYEDLINESLines which indicate the vehicle clearance anddistances to objects with reference to thebumper line sA are displayed on the monitor.

They are indicated as reference distances toobjects. The lines and colors in the display indi-cate distances from the back bumper line sA inthe illustration.

s1 1.5 ft (0.5 m) red

s2 3 ft (1 m) yellow

s3 7 ft (2 m) green

s4 10 ft (3 m) green

The vehicle clearance lines are wider thanthe actual clearance.

LHA0437

REARVIEW MONITOR (if soequipped)



ADJUSTING THE SCREENTo adjust the quality of the screen, press theSETUP button.

● To adjust the Brightness, Tint, Contrast, Dis-play ON/OFF and Color of the RearViewMonitor, press the SETUP button with theRearView Monitor on, then touch the “–” or“+” key on the item and adjust the level.

● Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Tintand Color of the RearView Monitor while thevehicle is moving.

OPERATING TIPS

● When the shift selector is shifted to R (Re-verse), the monitor screen automaticallychanges to the RearView Monitor mode.However, the radio can be heard.

● It may take some time until the RearViewMonitor is displayed after the shift selectorhas been shifted to R (Reverse). Objectsmay be distorted momentarily until the Rear-View Monitor screen is displayed com-pletely. When the shift selector is returned toa position other than R (Reverse), it may takesome time until the screen changes. Objectson the screen may be distorted until they arecompletely displayed.

● When the temperature is extremely high orlow, the screen may not clearly display ob-jects. This is not a malfunction.

● When strong light directly enters the cam-era, objects may not be displayed clearly.

● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on thescreen. This is due to strong reflected lightfrom the bumper. This is not a malfunction.

● The screen may flicker under fluorescentlight. This is not a malfunction.

● The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-tor may differ somewhat from those of theactual object.

● When the contrast of objects is low at night,pressing the SETUP button may not changethe brightness.

● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in adark place or at night.

● If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,the RearView Monitor may not display ob-jects. Clean the camera.

● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner toclean the camera. This will cause discolora-tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a clothdampened with a diluted mild cleaning agentand then wipe with a dry cloth.

● Do not damage the camera as the monitorscreen may be adversely affected.

● Do not use body wax on the camera window.If body wax does get on the camera window,wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-ened with mild detergent diluted with water.

LHA1013



Adjust air flow direction by moving the ventilatorslides.

Open or close the ventilators by using the dial.Move the dial toward the to open the ven-tilators or toward the to close them.

Right and LeftWHA0736

CenterWHA0737

Rear (sedan, if so equipped)WHA0688

VENTS



WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

● Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assistanceof others alone in your vehicle. Petsshould also not be left alone. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.

● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

1. Fan speed control/system OFF dial2. Air flow control buttons3. Temperature control dial4. Air conditioner button5. Rear window defroster6. MAX A/C button7. Front window defrost button8. Air recirculation button

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, andcontrols fan speed.

Air flow control buttons

The air flow control buttons allow you to selectthe air flow outlets.

MAXA/C

— Air flows from center and sidevents with maximum cooling.

— Air flows from center and sideventilators.

WHA1177

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual) (if so equipped)



— Air flows from center and sideventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.— Air flows from defroster outlets

and foot outlets.— Air flows mainly from defroster

outlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjustthe temperature of the outlet air. To lower thetemperature, turn the dial to the left. To increasethe temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

On position (Indicator light on):Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the button to the on position when:

● driving on a dusty road.

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-senger compartment.

● for maximum cooling when using the air con-ditioner.

Off position (Indicator light off):Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-ment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button

The button is provided only on vehicles equippedwith an air conditioner.

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position and push the button toturn on the air conditioner. The indicator lightcomes on when the air conditioner is operating.To turn off the air conditioner, push thebutton again.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switch

For more information about the rear window de-froster switch, see “Rear window and outsidemirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the“Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the footoutlets. Some air also flows from the defrostoutlets.

1. Press the button to the OFF positionfor normal heating.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position between the middle and thehot position.

VentilationThis mode directs outside air to the side andcenter ventilators.

1. Press the button to the OFF position.



4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position.

Defrosting or defoggingThis mode directs the air to the defrost outlets todefrost/defog the windows.

1. Press the defrost/defog button .





● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-dows, turn the fan control dial to the highestsetting and the temperature control to thefull HOT position.

● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,the indicator light on the button willnot come on) if the outside temperature ismore than 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode formore than one minute, the air conditioningsystem will continue to operate until the fancontrol dial is turned to OFF, the vehicle isshut off, or the A/C button is used to turn offthe compressor even if the air flow controldial is turned to a position other thanthe position. This dehumidifies the airwhich helps defog the windshield.The mode automatically turns off, al-lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas-senger compartment to further improve thedefogging performance.

Bi-level heating

The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the sideand center vents and to the front and rear flooroutlets.





Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-shield.




● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on if the out-side temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).This dehumidifies the air which helps defogthe windshield. The mode automati-cally turns off, allowing outside air to bedrawn into the passenger compartment tofurther improve the defogging performance.

Operating tipsClear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield. Thisimproves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATIONStart the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position, and push in the button toactivate the air conditioner. When the air condi-tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functionsare added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

CoolingThis mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.


2. Press MAX A/C or air flow controlbutton.




4. Push the button. the indicator lightcomes on.


● For quick cooling when the outside tem-perature is high, push the button tothe ON position. Be sure to return theto the OFF position for normal cooling. MAXA/C may be used for quick cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.




4. Push the button. The indicator lightcomes on.


Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows anddehumidify the air.



3. Press the button. The indicator lightcomes on.

When the or are selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however, theindicator light will not illuminate) if the outsidetemperature is more than 36°F (2°C). This dehu-midifies the air which helps defog the windshield.The mode automatically turns off, allowingoutside air to be drawn into the passenger com-partment to further improve the defogging perfor-mance.


Operating tips

● Keep the windows and moonroof closedwhile the air conditioner is in operation.

● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3minutes with the windows open to vent hotair from the passenger compartment. Then,close the windows. This allows the air con-ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

● The air conditioning system should beoperated for approximately 10 minutesat least once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from theventilators in hot, humid conditions as the airis cooled rapidly. This does not indicate amalfunction.

● If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button and dialpositions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,cooling or defrosting. The air recirculationbutton should always be in the OFF posi-tion for heating and defrosting.



WHA1179 WHA1180



WHA1181 WHA1182



WHA1183



1. Driver temperature control dial2. Air flow control buttons3. Passenger temperature control dial4. DUAL button5. Rear defrost button6. Front window defrost button7. Fan speed dial/system OFF button8. Air recirculation button9. A/C ON/OFF button10. AUTO button

WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.


● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls toactivate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling or heating (auto)

This mode may be normally used all year round asthe system automatically works to keep a con-stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automatically.

1. Push the AUTO button on.

2. Turn the driver’s side temperature controldial to the left or right to set the desiredtemperature. Driver and passenger tem-peratures can be set independently. PressDUAL or turn the passenger temperaturecontrol dial to the left or right to activate dualclimate control functions. Turn the passen-ger’s side temperature control dial to the leftor right to set the desired passenger’s tem-perature.

● Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F(24°C) for normal operation.

WHA1171

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(automatic) (if so equipped)



● The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically. Airflow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/offare also controlled automatically.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from theventilators in hot, humid conditions as the airis cooled rapidly. This does not indicate amalfunction.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Push the defroster control button toturn the system on. The indicator light in thebutton will illuminate.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or rightto set the desired temperature.

● To quickly remove ice from the outside of thewindows, turn the manual fan control to HI.

● As soon as possible after the windshield isclean, push the AUTO button to return to theauto mode.

● When the control is activated, the airconditioner will automatically be turned on atoutside temperatures above 36°F (2°C).This dehumidifies the air which helps defogthe windshield. The air recirculation modeautomatically turns off, allowing outside airto be drawn into the passenger compart-ment to further improve the defogging per-formance.

Rear window defroster switch

For more information about the rear window de-froster switch, see “Rear window and outsidemirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the“Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Turn the fan control dial left or right tomanually control the fan speed.

Press the /OFF button to turn the systemoff.

Push the AUTO button to return to automaticcontrol of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

Push the air recirculation button to recir-culate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicatorlight on the switch will come on.

The air recirculation button will not be activatedwhen the air conditioner is in DEF or mode.

Air flow controlPush the air flow control buttons to manuallycontrol air flow and select the air outlet:

— Air flows from center and sideventilators.

— Air flows from center and sideventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.— Air flows from defroster and foot

outlets.— Air flows from defroster outlets.

To turn system off

Press the /OFF button.



OPERATING TIPS● When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flowfrom the foot outlets may not operate for amaximum of 150 seconds. However, this isnot a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-ture warms up, air flow from the foot outletswill operate normally.

The sunload sensor, located on the top of theinstrument panel on the driver’s side, helps thesystem maintain a constant temperature. Do notput anything on or around this sensor.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed withthe environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’sozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricantswill cause severe damage to your air conditionersystem. See “Air conditioner system refrigerantand oil recommendations” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with proper equipment.

WHA0791

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER



RADIO

With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON posi-tion, press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knobto turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio withthe engine not running, the ignition should beplaced in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-ences. Intermittent changes in reception qualitynormally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-dio reception. These circuits are designed toextend reception range, and to enhance the qual-ity of that reception.

However, there are some general characteristicsof both FM and AM radio signals that can affectradio reception quality in a moving vehicle, evenwhen the finest equipment is used. These char-acteristics are completely normal in a given re-ception area and do not indicate any malfunctionin your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,signal distance and interference from other ve-hicles can work against ideal reception. De-scribed below are some of the factors that canaffect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise to comefrom the audio system speakers. Storing the de-vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-nate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTIONRange: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FMhaving slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-nal influences may sometimes interfere with FMstation reception even if the FM station is within25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal isdirectly related to the distance between thetransmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-acteristics as light. For example, they will reflectoff objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away froma station transmitter, the signals will tend to fadeand/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference frombuildings, large hills or due to antenna position(usually in conjunction with increased distancefrom the station transmitter), static or flutter canbe heard. This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and reflectedsignals reach the receiver at the same time. Thesignals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTIONAM signals, because of their low frequency, canbend around objects and skip along the ground.In addition, the signals can be bounced off theionosphere and bent back to earth. Because ofthese characteristics, AM signals are also sub-ject to interference as they travel from transmitterto receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur for severalseconds during ionospheric turbulence even inareas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

AUDIO SYSTEM (if so equipped)



SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if soequipped)When the satellite radio is first installed or thebattery has been replaced, the satellite radio maynot work properly. This is not a malfunction. Waitmore than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON andthe vehicle outside of any metal or large buildingfor satellite radio to receive all of the necessarydata.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT band option isselected unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed and an XMT satellite radioservice subscription is active. Satellite radio isnot available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected ifcargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radiosignal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satelliteantenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna canaffect satellite radio performance. Remove theice to restore satellite radio reception AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

● Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD changer/player.

● Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/or CDchanger.

● Only one CD can be loaded into the CDplayer at a time.

● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

● During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

● The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

● The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the compartment tempera-ture is extremely high or low.Decrease/increase the temperaturebefore use.

LHA0099



● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

● CDs that are in poor condition or aredirty, scratched or covered with finger-prints may not work properly.

● The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

● CDs that are not round

● CDs with a paper label

● CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

● This audio system can only play pre-recorded CDs. It has no capability torecord or burn CDs.

● If the CD cannot be played, one of thefollowing messages will be displayed.

1. MP3 or WMA file not supported → “UN-PLAYABLE TRACK” → Go to next track

2. CD ROM → “No Audio Track” → Eject discand go to the last mode (CD player only) /Go to next disc (CD changer only)

3. TEMP/MECH ERROR → “PRESS EJECT”

4. READ/FOCUS ERROR → “CHECK DISC”

CHECK DISC:

● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-rectly (the label side is facing up,etc.).

● Confirm that the CD is not bent orwarped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-perature inside the player. Remove theCD by pressing the EJECT button. Aftera short time, reinsert the CD. The CDcan be played when the temperature ofthe player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-tem (only MP3 or WMA CD).

Compact Disc with MP3 or WMA

Terms:

● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving PicturesExperts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is themost well-known compressed digital audiofile format. This format allows for near “CDquality” sound, but at a fraction of the size ofnormal audio files. MP3 conversion of anaudio track from CD-ROM can reduce thefile size by approximately a 10:1 ratio withvirtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3compression removes the redundant andirrelevant parts of a sound signal that thehuman ear doesn’t hear.

● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is acompressed audio format created by Mi-crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMAcodec offers greater file compression thanthe MP3 codec, enabling storage of moredigital audio tracks in the same amount ofspace when compared to MP3s at the samelevel of quality.

● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number ofbits per second used by a digital music file.The size and quality of a compressed digitalaudio file is determined by the bit rate usedwhen encoding the file.



● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequencyis the rate at which the samples of a signalare converted from analog to digital (A/Dconversion) per second.

● Multisession — Multisession is one of themethods for writing data to media. Writingdata once to the media is called a singlesession, and writing more than once is calleda multisession.

● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is thepart of the encoded MP3 or WMA file thatcontains information about the digital musicfile such as song title, artist, encoding bitrate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-mation is displayed on the Artist/song titleline on the display.

* WindowsT and Windows MediaT are regis-tered trademarks and trademarks in the UnitedStates of America and other countries of Mi-crosoft Corporation of the USA.

Playback order:

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMAfiles is as illustrated.

● The names of folders not containing MP3 orWMA files are not shown in the display.

● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,“Root Folder” is displayed.

● The playback order is the order in which thefiles were written by the writing software.Therefore, the files might not play in thedesired order.

Playback order chartWHA1078



Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supportedversions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*201: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.



Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters forfolder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound qualityCheck if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long timebefore the music startsplaying.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skipsThe writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match thespecifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit ratefiles

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to thenext song when playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, therewill be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back inthe desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.



1. SEEK/TRACK button2. CD insert slot3. TUNE/FF·REW button4. CD eject button5. AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE

and BALANCE)

6. CLOCK button7. AUX IN jack8. SCAN button9. RDM/RPT button10. PWR/VOL control knob11. AUX button

12. RADIO button13. CD button14. DISP button15. PRESET A·B·C button16. Station select (1 - 6) buttons17. pause/mute button

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACTDISC (CD) PLAYER

For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-tion precautions” earlier in this section.

Audio main operation

PWR/VOL control knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition, then press the PWR/VOL control knob.If you listen to the radio with the engine notrunning, place the ignition in the ACC position.The mode (radio or CD) that was playing imme-diately before the system was turned off resumesplaying.

When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.Pressing the PWR/VOL control knob again turnsthe system off.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to the right toincrease volume or to the left to decrease volume.

LHA0728



AUDIO button (Bass, Treble, Fade and Bal-ance)

Press the AUDIO button to change the mode asfollows:

Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance → BeepON/OFF → Audio → Bass

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance pressthe AUDIO button until the desired mode ap-pears in the display. Press the

TUNE/FF·REW or to adjust Bassand Treble to the desired level. You can also usethe TUNE/FF·REW button to adjust Fade andBalance mode. Fade adjusts the sound level be-tween the front and rear speakers and Balanceadjusts the sound between the right and leftspeaker.

To turn the Beep sound off or on, press theAUDIO button until Beep is displayed. Press the

TUNE/FF·REW button or until thedesired mode is displayed. This turns on or turnsoff the beep sound when audio buttons arepressed.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. Other-wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyreappear after about 10 seconds.

DISP (display) button:

Pressing the DISP (display) button will show textabout CD information in the audio display.

If the text information is to long to fully be dis-played on the screen; press and hold the DISPbutton for longer than 1.5 seconds to scrollthrough the rest of the text.

CD display mode

To change the text displayed while playing a CDwith text, press the DISP button. The DISP buttonwill allow you to scroll

through CD text as follows: Track number andTrack time → Album title → Song title.

● Track number displays the track number se-lected on the disc.

● Track time displays the amount of time thetrack has played.

● Album title displays the title of the CD beingplayed.

● Song title displays the title of the selectedCD track.

Clock operation

Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clockwith the radio on or off. Press the CLOCK buttonagain to turn off the clock display.

Clock set

1. Press and hold the CLOCK button for ap-proximately 2 seconds.

2. The display will show “H-Seek M-Tune”.

3. Press the SEEK/TRACK buttonor to adjust the hours.

4. Press TUNE/FF·REW buttonor to adjust the minutes.

5. Press the CLOCK button again to exit theclock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock displayafter 10 seconds, or you may press the CLOCKbutton again to return to the regular clock display.

pause/mute button:

To mute or pause the audio sound, press

the pause/mute button. Press thebutton again to resume the audio sound.

FM/AM radio operation

FM/AM band select:

Pressing the RADIO button will change the bandas follows:

AM ←→ FM



When the RADIO button is pressed while theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, theradio will come on at the station last played.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIObutton is pressed, the compact disc will auto-matically be turned off and the last radio stationplayed will come on.

The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates duringFM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio automatically changesfrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE/FF·REW (tuning)

button:

Press the TUNE/FF·REW button orfor manual tuning. To move quickly through thechannels, hold the tuning buttons down.

SEEK (tuning) button:

Press the SEEK/TRACK button orto tune from high to low or low to high frequen-cies and stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN (tuning) button:

Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in thedisplay window. Scan tuning begins from low tohigh frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 sec-onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-

cient signal strength. When scanning, SCANblinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN buttonagain during this 5 second period stops scantuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.

Station memory operations:

18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio tothe A, B and C preset button in any combinationof AM or FM stations.

1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to changebetween storage banks. The radio displaysthe icon A, B or C to indicate which set ofpresets are active.

2. Tune to the desired station using manualTUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any ofthe desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)until a beep sound is heard. (The radio muteswhen the select button is pressed.)

3. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Programming is nowcomplete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition, and carefully insert the compact discinto the slot with the label side up. The compactdisc is automatically pulled into the slot and startsto play.

If the radio is already operating, it automaticallyturns off and the compact disc begins to play.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with a compactdisc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turnsoff and the last used compact disc starts to play.

TUNE/FF·REW (Fast For-

ward, Rewind) button:

When the TUNE/FF·REW button oris pressed while the compact disc is playing, thecompact disc plays at an increased speed whilefast forwarding or rewinding. When the button isreleased, the compact disc returns to normal playspeed.

SEEK/TRACK button:

When is pressed while the compact discis playing, the next track following the presentone starts to play from the beginning.Press several times to skip several tracks.



Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-vances 1 additional track. The track number ap-pears in the display window. (When the last trackon the compact disc is skipped, the first track isplayed.)

When is pressed, the track being playedreturns to the beginning. Press severaltimes to skip back several tracks. Each time thebutton is pressed the CD moves back 1 track.

RDM/RPT button:

When the RDM/RPT button is pressed while thecompact disc is being played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

Random Disc ←→ Repeat Track ←→ Normal

Random Disc: The order of the tracks on the discwill be mixed during play.

Repeat Track: The track that is currently playingwill be repeated.

SCAN (CDs) button:

Press the SCAN button less than 1.5 seconds toscan all tracks of the current disc for 10 secondsper track. The SCAN icon is flashed during scanmode.

The scan mode is canceled once it scans throughall tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN button ispressed during scan mode.

CD EJECT:

When the button is pressed with a com-pact disc loaded, the compact disc will beejected.

When the button is pressed while thecompact disc is playing, the compact disc willeject and the system will turn off.

CD IN indicator:

A CD icon indicator appears on the display whena CD is loaded with the system on.

AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. TheAUX IN audio input jack accepts any standardanalog audio input such as from a portable cas-sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop com-puters.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible devicewhen it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.



1. SEEK/TRACK button2. CD insert slot3. TUNE/FF·REW button4. CD eject button

5. AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE,SSV, BALANCE and BEEPS)

6. CLOCK button7. AUX IN jack8. SCAN button

9. RDM/RPT button10. PWR/VOL control knob11. AUX button12. RADIO* button13. CD button14. DISP button15. PRESET A·B·C button16. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons17. CD load button

*No satellite radio reception is availableunless there is an active XMT satelliteradio service subscription. Satellite ra-dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaiiand Guam. If satellite radio is not opera-tional then pressing the RADIO buttonwill switch between FM and AM bands.

Type ALHA0729



FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (ifso equipped)


No satellite radio reception is available unlessthere is an active XMT satellite radio servicesubscription. Satellite radio is not available inAlaska, Hawaii and Guam. If satellite radio is notoperational then pressing the RADIO button willswitch between FM and AM bands.


PWR/VOL control knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition, and then press the PWR/VOL controlknob while the system is off to call up the mode(radio or CD) which was playing immediatelybefore the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the PWR/VOL con-trol knob.

Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to adjust thevolume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volumechanges as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO button (Bass, Treble, Fade, SSV,Balance and Beeps)

Press the AUDIO button to change the mode asfollows:

Bass → Treble → Fade → Spd Sen Vol → Bal-ance → Beep ON/OFF → Audio → Bass

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance pressthe AUDIO button until the desired mode ap-pears in the display. Press the

TUNE/FF·REW or to adjust Bassand Treble to the desired level. You can also usethe TUNE/FF·REW button to adjust Fade andBalance mode. Fade adjusts the sound level be-tween the front and rear speakers and Balanceadjusts the sound between the right and leftspeaker.

To turn the Beep sound off or on, press theAUDIO button until Beep is displayed. Press the

TUNE/FF·REW button or until thedesired mode is displayed. This turns on or turnsoff the beep sound when audio buttons arepressed.

To change the Speed Sensitive Volume mode toOFF, LOW, MID or HIGH, press the TUNE/FF·REW button.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly

until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyreappear after about 10 seconds.

Clock operation

Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clockwith the radio on or off. Press the CLOCK buttonagain to turn off the clock display.

Clock set

1. Press and hold the CLOCK button for ap-proximately 2 seconds.

2. The display will show “H-Seek M-Tune”.

3. Press the SEEK/TRACK buttonor to adjust the hours.

4. Press TUNE/FF·REW buttonor to adjust the minutes.

5. Press the CLOCK button again to exit theclock set mode.

The display will return to the regular clock displayafter 10 seconds, or you may press the CLOCKbutton again to return to the regular clock display.

DISP (display) button:

Pressing the DISP (display) button will show textinformation about CD, MP3 and SAT (satellite, ifso equipped) in the audio display.



If the text information is to long to fully be dis-played on the screen; press and hold the DISPbutton for longer than 1.5 seconds to scrollthrough the rest of the text.

CD display mode

To change the text displayed while playing a CDwith text, press the DISP button. The DISP buttonwill allow you to scroll through CD text as follows:Track number and Track time ←→ Album title←→ Song title.

● Track number displays the track number se-lected on the disc.

● Track time displays the amount of time thetrack has played.

● Album title displays the title of the CD beingplayed.

● Song title displays the title of the selectedCD track.

MP3 display mode

To change the text displayed when listening to aCD with MP3s and ID3 tags, press the DISPbutton. The DISP button will scroll through theCD text as follows: Track number and Track time←→ Folder title ←→ Album title ←→ Artist name←→ Song title.

● Track time displays the amount of time thecurrent track has been playing.

● Track number displays the number of thetrack playing on the selected disc.

● Folder title displays the title of the folder.

● Album title displays the title of the album ofthe song playing.

● Artist name displays the name of the artist ofthe song playing.

● Song title displays the title of the song play-ing.

Satellite radio display mode (if soequipped)

To change the text displayed when listening tosatellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISPbutton. The DISP button will scroll through thebroadcast information as follows: Channel num-ber → Category name → Channel name → Artistname → Song title.

● Channel number displays the channel num-ber of the selected satellite radio station.

● Category name displays the category nameof the selected satellite radio station.

● Channel name displays the channel namethe selected satellite radio station.

● Artist name displays the name of the artist,host or weather condition of the selectedsatellite radio station.

● Song title displays the song title, showname, or temperature of the selected satel-lite radio station.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT band select:


AM ←→ FM ←→ SAT (satellite, if so equipped)

When the RADIO button is pressed while theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, theradio will come on at the station last played.



The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FMstereo reception. When the stereo broadcast



signal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE/FF·REW (tuning)

button:

Press the TUNE/FF·REW button orfor manual tuning. To move quickly through thechannels, hold the tuning buttons down.

SEEK (tuning) button:

Press the SEEK/TRACK button orto tune from high to low or low to high frequen-cies and stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN (tuning) button:

Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in thedisplay window. Scan tuning begins from low tohigh frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 sec-onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-cient signal strength. When scanning, SCANblinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN buttonagain during this 5 second period stops scantuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.


18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio tothe A, B and C preset button in any combinationof AM or FM stations.

1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to changebetween storage banks. The radio displaysthe icon A, B or C to indicate which set ofpresets are active.

2. Tune to the desired station using manualTUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any ofthe desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)until a beep sound is heard. (The radio muteswhen the select button is pressed.)

3. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Programming is nowcomplete.


If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, butmany stations are now considering broadcastingRDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Clas-sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, theRDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ONposition and insert the compact disc into the slotwith the label side facing up. The compact discwill be guided automatically into the slot and startplaying. To insert the disc, first press thebutton.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing the PWR buttonwill start the compact disc.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discsin the CD changer.

CD load button:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, pressthe load button for less than 1.5 seconds.Select the loading slot by pressing the CD insertselect button (1 – 6), then insert the CD.



To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, pressthe load button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on thedisplay when CDs are loaded into the changer.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with the systemoff and the compact disc loaded, the system willturn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with the com-pact disc loaded but the radio playing, the radiowill automatically be turned off and the compactdisc will start to play.

TUNE/FF·REW

(fast forward, rewind)

button:

When the TUNE/FF·REW or buttonis pressed while the compact disc is playing, thecompact disc plays at an increased speed whilefast forwarding or rewinding. When the button isreleased, the CD returns to normal play speed.

MP3 TUNE/FF·REW

button:

While playing an MP3, press the

TUNE/FF·REW or button to scanforward or backward through available folders.

To fast forward or rewind through an MP3 audio

track, press the TUNE/FF·REW orbutton for more than 1.5 seconds.

SEEK/TRACK button:

When is pressed while the compact discis playing, the track following the present onestarts to play from the beginning. Pressseveral times to skip several tracks. Each time thebutton is pressed, the CD advances 1 additionaltrack. The track number appears in the displaywindow. (When the last track on the compactdisc is skipped, the first track is played.)

When is pressed, the track being playedreturns to the beginning. Press severaltimes to skip back several tracks. Each time thebutton is pressed, the CD moves back 1 track.

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded, press aCD select button (1 – 6).

RDM/RPT button:

When the RDM/RPT button is pressed while acompact disc is being played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

Random All Discs* → Random Disc → RepeatDisc → Repeat Track → normal → Random AllDiscs

Random All Discs: The loaded discs will beplayed randomly, not in sequence of how they areloaded.Random Disc: The tracks on the current selecteddisc will be played randomly.Repeat Disc: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.Repeat Track: The current track will be repeated.

*This mode is only available when multiple CDsare loaded into the CD changer.

MP3 RDM/RPT button:

When the RDM/RPT button is pressed while anMP3 compact disc is being played, the playpattern can be changed as follows:

Random All Discs* → Random Disc → RepeatDisc → Random Folder → Repeat Folder →Repeat Track → normal → Random All Discs

Random All Discs: The loaded discs will beplayed randomly, not in sequence of how they areloaded.



Random Disc: The tracks on the current selecteddisc will be played randomly.Repeat Disc: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.Random Folder: The folders on the current MP3disc will be played randomly.Repeat Folder: The current folder being playedwill be repeated.Repeat Track: The current track will be repeated.

*This mode is only available when multiple CDsare loaded into the CD changer.

SCAN button:

1 Disc, All Tracks

While listening to a CD, press the SCAN buttonto preview the first 10 seconds of each track onthe CD playing. Pressing the SCAN button againduring this 10 second period stops the scan andthe CD remains on that track.

All Discs, 1 Track

While listening to a CD with other CDs loadedinto the CD changer, press and hold the SCANbutton for approximately 2 seconds, to previewthe first 10 seconds of the first track on the CDsloaded. Pressing the SCAN button again duringthis 10 second period stops the scan and thecurrent loaded CD will remain playing.

MP3 SCAN mode:

1 Disc All Folders

While listening to an MP3 CD, press the SCANbutton to preview the first 10 seconds of eachtrack in each folder on the MP3 CD playing.Pressing the SCAN button again during this 10second period stops the scan and the CD re-mains on that track and folder.

All Discs, 1 Track, 1 Folder

While listening to an MP3 CD with other CDsloaded into the CD changer, press and hold theSCAN button for approximately 2 seconds, topreview the first 10 seconds of the first track inthe first folder on the MP3 CDs loaded. Pressingthe SCAN button again during this 10 secondperiod stops the scan and the current loaded CDwill remain playing.

CD Eject:

Current/Selected disc:

● Press the button, then press the slotnumber (1 – 6) for the desired disc. Thecompact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-ber (1 – 6) is pressed the current loadeddisc will be ejected. Also, if the ejected discis not removed within 15 seconds, the discwill reload.

All discs:

● Press and hold the button for morethan 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will beejected one by one. If a disc is not removedwithin 15 seconds, or the button is pressedagain during the eject sequence, the entiredisc eject sequence will be canceled. Whenthis button is pressed while the compactdisc is being played, the compact disc willeject and the last source will be played.

CD IN indicator:

A CD icon indicator appears on the display whena CD is loaded with the system on.

AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. TheAUX IN audio input jack accepts any standardanalog audio input such as from a portable cas-sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop com-puters.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible devicewhen it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.



1. RADIO* button2. Touch-screen keys (vary depending on

what function is selected)3. SEEK/TRACK button4. TUNE·FOLDER and AUDIO control

knob (BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE,FADE and SSV (if so equipped))

5. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons6. CD insert slot7. CD changer select (1 - 6) buttons8. CD eject button9. AUX jack10. A·B·C button11. ON·OFF/VOL control knob12. CD/AUX button

*No satellite radio reception is availableunless there is an active XMT satelliteradio service subscription. Satellite ra-dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaiiand Guam. If satellite radio is not opera-tional then pressing the RADIO buttonwill switch between FM and AM bands.

Type BLHA0730



FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (ifso equipped)



Reference symbols:

RADIO button — This is a button on the radio. Bypressing this button you can select the item orperform this action.

“Display” key — This is a select key on the touch-screen. By touching this key you can proceed tothe next function.


ON·OFF/VOL control:

Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ONposition, then press the ON·OFF/VOL controlknob while the audio system is off to call up themode (radio or CD) which was playing immedi-ately before the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the ON·OFF/VOLcontrol knob.

Turn the ON·OFF/VOL control knob to adjust thevolume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volumechanges as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO knob (Bass, Treble, Balance, Fade,and SSV):

Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode asfollows:

Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade → Audio →Bass

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fade pressthe AUDIO knob until the desired mode appearsin the display. Turn the Tuning knob to adjustBass and Treble to the desired level. You can alsouse the Tuning knob to adjust Fade and Balancemodes. Fade adjusts the sound level between thefront and rear speakers and Balance adjusts thesound between the right and left speakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. Other-wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyreappear after about 10 seconds.

To change the SSV mode from 0 to 5, press theSETUP button. Then touch the “Audio” key, theaudio settings screen will be displayed. Touchthe “–” or “+” key to change the SSV.

While in this screen you can also adjust the otheraudio settings by touching the correspondingkey.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, touch the “Back” key repeatedlyuntil the radio or the CD display reappears.

Clock set

For setting the clock, see “Adjusting the time”earlier in this section.

LHA0747



CD display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CDcertain text might be displayed (when CD en-coded with text is being used).

Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD isencoded the following text might be displayedduring CD playback:

● Disc number displays which disc is playing

● Folder number displays the folder number onthe CD that is being played.

● Track number displays the number of thetrack that is being played.

● Track time displays the amount of time thecurrent track has been playing.

● Title displays the name of the song playing.

● Artist displays the name of the artist.

● Album displays the name of the album.

Satellite radio display

Some satellite stations might broadcast informa-tion that shows up in the display.

Depending on what the station decides to broad-cast the following text might be displayed:

● Channel number displays the channel num-ber of the selected satellite radio station.

● Category name displays the category nameof the selected satellite radio station.

● Channel name displays the channel name ofthe selected satellite radio station.

● Artist name displays the name of the artist,host or weather condition of the selectedsatellite radio station.

● Song title displays the song title, showname, or temperature of the selected satel-lite radio station.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT band select:


AM ←→ FM ←→ SAT

When the RADIO button is pressed with theignition switch in the ACC or ON position, theradio will come on at the station last played.



The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FMstereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE·FOLDER (tuning) knob:

To manually tune the radio, turn theTUNE·FOLDER tuning knob to the right or left.

LHA1009



SEEK/TRACK (tuning)

button:

Press the SEEK/TRACK button orfor less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to lowor low to high frequencies and stop at the nextbroadcasting station.

“Scan” (tuning) key:

Touch the “Scan” key. SCAN illuminates in thedisplay window. Scan tuning begins from low tohigh frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 sec-onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-cient signal strength. Touching the “Scan” keyagain during this 5 second period stops scantuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.


18 stations can be set for the FM, AM or SAT(Satellite if so equipped) radio to the A, B and Cpreset button in any combination of FM, AM orSAT stations.

1. Press the A·B·C button or the “Preset” key toselect preset channel A, B or C.

2. Press the RADIO button to select the de-sired FM, AM or SAT station band.

3. Tune to the desired station using manualtuning, seek tuning or scan tuning. Pressand hold any of the desired station memory

(1 – 6) buttons until a beep sound is heard(the station will now appear in one of the 1 –6 keys on the screen)

4. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Memorizing is nowcomplete.


If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseblows, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, butmany stations are now considering broadcastingRDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Clas-sical”, “Country” or “Rock”.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, theRDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation

With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi-tion, press one of the CD changer (1 – 6) but-tons. Once the CD slot has open insert thecompact disc into the slot with the label sidefacing up. The compact disc will be guided auto-matically into the slot and start playing.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing the ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the compact disc.

Loading buttons:

1 Disc Load:

● Press one of the CD changer (1 – 6) selectbuttons for less than 1.5 seconds, then in-sert the CD.

● While in CD mode press one of the stationand CD select (1 – 6) buttons on the radio,then insert the CD.

● While in CD mode press one of the CD (1 –6) keys on the screen, then insert the CD.

All Disc Load:

● Press and hold one of the CD changer (1 –6) buttons for more than 1.5 seconds.



The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on thedisplay when CDs are loaded into the changer.

When one of the CD changer (1 – 6) buttons ispressed with the compact disc loaded but theradio playing, the radio will automatically beturned off and the compact disc will start to play.

DISC button:

When the DISC button is pressed with the sys-tem off and the compact disc loaded, the systemwill turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the DISC button is pressed with the com-pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radiowill automatically be turned off and the compactdisc will start to play.

TUNE·FOLDER knob:

While playing an MP3 CD to skip through foldersturn the TUNE·FOLDER knob right or left to skipforward or backward through the available fold-ers.

This function will only operate on an MP3 CD withmultiple folders.

“Folder” key:

While playing an MP3 CD you can select a trackinside a folder. Touch the “Folder” key; a listscreen displays. Touch one of the folder selectkeys; another list screen displays. Touch one of

the file select keys; the system will start playingthat track in the selected folder.

SEEK/TRACK button:

When the SEEK/TRACK button ispressed for less than 1.5 seconds while a com-pact disc is playing, the track being played re-turns to its beginning. Press several times to skipback through tracks. The compact disc will goback the number of times the button is pressed.

When the SEEK/TRACK button ispressed for less than 1.5 seconds while thecompact disc is playing, the next track will start toplay from its beginning. Press several times toskip through tracks. The compact disc will ad-vance the number of times the button is pressed.(When the last track on the compact disc isskipped through, the first track will be played.)

When pressing the SEEK/TRACK (fastforward) or (rewind) button for more than1.5 seconds, the CD being played will fast for-ward or rewind. When the button is released, theCD will return to normal play speed.

“Track” key:

While playing a CD or an MP3 CD you can selecta track or file on the disc. Touch the “Track” key, a

list screen displays. Touch one of the track or fileselect keys, the system will start playing that trackor file.

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded:

● Touch one of the CD select (1–6) keys onthe touch-screen or

● Press one of the station and CD select (1 –6) buttons on the radio or

● Press one of the CD changer (1 – 6) selectbuttons.

“Scan” key:

While listening to a CD, touch the “Scan” key topreview the first 10 seconds of each track on thecurrent CD playing. Touching the “Scan” keyduring this 10 second period stops the scan andthe CD remains on that track.

“Repeat” key:

When the “Repeat” key is touched while a com-pact disc is played, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

CD:

1 DISC RPT → 1 TRACK RPT



MP3 CD:

1 DISC RPT → 1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRACKRPT

1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playingwill be repeated1 FOLDER RPT: The folder that is currently play-ing will be repeated.

“Random” key:

When the “Random” key is touched while a com-pact disc is played, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

CD:

ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM

MP3 CD:

ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → 1 FOLDERRDM

ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will beplayed randomly.1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-rently playing will be played randomly.1 FOLDER RDM: Folders from that disc that iscurrently playing will be played randomly.

CD EJECT:

Current/Selected disc:

● Press the button. The loaded com-pact disc will be ejected. Also, if the ejecteddisc is not removed within 15 seconds, thedisc will reload.

All discs:

● Press and hold the button for morethan 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will beejected one by one. If a disc is not removedwithin 15 seconds, or the button ispressed again during the eject sequence,the entire disc eject sequence will be can-celed.

When this button is pressed while the compactdisc is being played, the compact disc will ejectand the next compact disc will be loaded. If nodisc is loaded, the system will stay on the com-pact disc screen.

CD IN indicator:

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDshave been loaded into the changer in CD modeonly.

CD/AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX jack is located above the CD changer.The AUX audio input jack accepts any standardanalog audio input such as from a portable cas-sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptopcomputer.

Press the CD/AUX button to play a compatibledevice when it is plugged into the AUX jack.



CD CARE AND CLEANING● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.● Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center

to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Donot wipe the disc using a circular motion.

● Do not use a conventional record cleaner oralcohol intended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on the inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges byrubbing the inner and outer edges with theside of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

1. Source select and Power on switch2. Tuning switch3. Volume control switch


LHA0049Type A

LHA0752

Type BLHA0753




STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)

POWER on switch

With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi-tion, push the SOURCE switch to turn the audiosystem on.

SOURCE select switch:

Push the SOURCE select switch to change themode in the following sequence: PRESET A →PRESET B → PRESET C → CD* → AUX** →PRESET A

*This mode is only available when a CD is loaded.

**This mode is only available when a compatibleauxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack.

While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,

B or C), use the tuning switch or toselect one of the preset radio stations (1 – 6).

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch to increase ordecrease the volume.

Tuning

Memory change (radio):

While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,

B or C), push the tuning switch orfor less than 1.5 seconds to change to the nextpreset station in memory.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch or for morethan 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previousradio station.

Next/Previous track (CD):

Push the tuning switch or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of thepresent track or skip to the next track. Pushseveral times to skip back or skip through tracks.

Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):

Push the tuning switch or for morethan 1.5 seconds to change the playing disc upor down.

ANTENNA

Window antennaThe antenna pattern is printed inside the rearwindow.

Type CLHA0754



CAUTION

● Do not place metalized film near therear window glass or attach any metalparts to it. This may cause poor recep-tion or noise.

● When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the rear window antenna.Lightly wipe along the antenna with adampened soft cloth.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone inyour NISSAN, be sure to observe the followingprecautions; otherwise, the new equipment mayadversely affect the engine control system andother electronic parts.

WARNING

● A cellular telephone should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation. Some juris-dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-phones while driving.

● If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended. Ex-ercise extreme caution at all times sofull attention may be given to vehicleoperation.

● If you are unable to devote full attentionto vehicle operation while talking onthe phone, pull off the road to a safelocation and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic controlmodules.

● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic con-trol system harnesses. Do not route theantenna wire next to any harness.

● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

● Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO



WARNING

● Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.


CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System. If you have an ap-proved BluetoothT enabled cellular phone, youcan set up the wireless connection between yourcellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.With BluetoothT wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call withyour cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto-matically connected with the in-vehicle phone

WHA1042

BLUETOOTHT HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)



module when the ignition switch is placed in theON position with the paired cellular phone turnedon and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different BluetoothTcellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.However, you can talk on only one cellular phoneat a time.

Before using the BluetoothT Hands-Free PhoneSystem, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between acellular phone and the in-vehicle phonemodule before using the hands-free phonesystem.

● Some BluetoothT enabled cellular phonesmay not be recognized by the in-vehiclephone module. Please visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-mended phone list and pairing.

● You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive a cellular signal; suchas in a tunnel, in an underground parkinggarage, near a tall building or in a moun-tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent itfrom being dialed.

● When the radio wave condition is not idealor ambient sound is too loud, it may bedifficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-ing a call.

● Do not place the cellular phone in an areasurrounded by metal or far away from thein-vehicle phone module to prevent tonequality degradation and wireless connectiondisruption.

● While a cellular phone is connected throughthe BluetoothT wireless connection, the bat-tery power of the cellular phone may dis-charge quicker than usual. The BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System cannot chargecellular phones.

● If the hands-free phone system seems to bemalfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”later in this section. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

● Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise tocome from the audio system speakers. Stor-ing the device in a different location mayreduce or eliminate the noise.

● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manualregarding the telephone charges, cellularphone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance withFCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only thesupplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,modification, or attachments could damagethe transmitter and may violate FCC regula-tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference,including interference that may cause un-desired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept anyinterference, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-quirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.



BLUETOOTHt is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.,U.S.A. and licensed toVisteon.

USING THE SYSTEM

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allowshands-free operation of the BluetoothT PhoneSystem.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands maynot be available so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,which takes a few seconds. If the button ispressed before the initialization completes, thesystem will announce “Hands-free phone systemnot ready” and will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSANVoice Recognition system, observe the following:

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet aspossible. Close the windows to eliminatesurrounding noises (traffic noises, vibrationsounds, etc.), which may prevent the systemfrom recognizing voice commands correctly.

● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking acommand. Otherwise, the command will notbe received properly.

● Start speaking a command within 5 secondsafter the tone sounds.

● Speak in a natural voice without pausingbetween words.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, pressand release the button located on thesteering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak acommand.

The command given is picked up by the micro-phone, and voice feedback is given when thecommand is accepted.

● If you need to hear the available commandsfor the current menu again, say “Help” andthe system will repeat them.

● If a command is not recognized, the systemannounces, “Command not recognized.Please try again.” Repeat the command in aclear voice.

● If you want to go back to the previous com-mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-tion” any time the system is waiting for aresponse.

● You can cancel a command when the sys-tem is waiting for a response by saying,“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You canalso press the button on the steeringwheel at any time. Whenever the VR sessionis cancelled, a double beep sounds to indi-cate you have exited the system.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the voicefeedback, press the volume control switches(+ or -) on the steering wheel while beingprovided with feedback. You can also usethe radio volume control knob.

● In most cases you can interrupt the voicefeedback to speak the next command bypressing the button on the steeringwheel.



● To speed the operation you can say multiplecommands. For example, press thebutton then say “Phonebook, New entry”rather than “Phonebook.” Wait for the voicefeedback prompt then say “New entry”.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certainway to speak numbers in voice commands. Referto the following rules and examples.

● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh six six two six two ohoh”, or

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two ohoh”

● Words can be used for the first 4 digitsplaces only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight hundred six six two six two ohoh”,

– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixtytwo hundred, and

– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty twohundred.

● Numbers can be spoken in small groups.The system will prompt you to continue en-tering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight zero zero”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six six two”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six two zero zero”

● Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-able when using the “Call International”command and the “Send” command duringa call).

● Say “plus” for “+” (available only when usingthe “Call International” command).

● Say “pause” for a 2 second pause (availableonly when storing a phone book number).

● You can say “star” for “*” and “pound” for “#”at any time in any position of the phonenumber (available only when using Call In-ternational command).

See “List of voice commands” and “Interna-tional” later in this section for more informa-tion.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

– “One five five five one two one two starone two three”

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers assingle digits.

The voice command “Help” is available at anytime. Please use the “Help” command to getinformation on how to use the system.



CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steeringwheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initiate a VRsession or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the button toskip through system feedback and toenter commands during a call. See “Listof voice commands” and “During a call”later in this section for more information.

PHONE/END

Press the button to cancel a VRsession or end a call.

GETTING STARTED

The following procedures will help you getstarted using the BluetoothT Hands-Free PhoneSystem with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-ditional command options, refer to “List of voicecommands” later in this section.

Choosing a languageYou can interact with the BluetoothT Hands-FreePhone System using English, Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press the PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the hands-freephone system to enter the speaker adapta-tion mode or press the PHONE/END( ) button to select a different lan-guage.”

3. Press the button.

For information on speaker adaptation, see“Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” later in thissection.

4. The system announces the current languageand gives you the option to change the lan-guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (inFrench). Use the following chart to selectthe language.

NOTE:

You must press the button orthe button within 5 seconds tochange the language.

Currentlanguage

Press(PHONE/SEND)

to select

Press(PHONE/END)

to select

English Spanish French

Spanish English French

French English Spanish

5. If you decide not to change the language, donot press either button. After 5 seconds, theVR session will end, and the language willnot be changed.

LHA0757



Pairing procedure

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performedwhen the vehicle is stationary. If the vehiclestarts moving during the procedure, theprocedure will be cancelled.

Main Menu

“Setup” sA

“Pair phone” sB

“New phone” sC

Initiate from handset sD

Name phone sE

Assign priority sF

Choose ringtone sG

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel. The system announces the availablecommands.

2. Say: “Setup” sA . The system acknowledgesthe command and announces the next set ofavailable commands.

3. Say: “Pair phone” sB . The system acknowl-edges the command and announces thenext set of available commands.

4. Say: “New phone” sC . The system acknowl-edges the command and asks you to initiatepairing from the phone handset sD .

The pairing procedure of the cellular phonevaries according to each cellular phonemodel. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel-lular phones.

When prompted for a Passkey code, enter“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN andcannot be changed.

5. The system asks you to say a name for thephone sE .

If the name is too long or too short, thesystem tells you, then prompts you for aname again.

Also, if more than one phone is paired andthe name sounds too much like a namealready used, the system tells you, thenprompts you for a name again.

6. The system asks you to assign a priority levelsF . The priority level determines whichphone is active when more than one pairedBluetoothT phone is in the vehicle. Followthe instructions provided by the system or

refer to “Setup” later in this section for moreinformation on changing priorities.

7. The system will ask if you would like to selecta custom ring tone sG . Follow the instruc-tions provided by the system or refer to“Setup” later in this section for more infor-mation on selecting ringtones.

Making a call by entering a phonenumber

Main Menu

“Call” sA

Number (speak digits) sB

“Dial” sC

1. Press the button on steering wheel. Atone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” sA . The system acknowledgesthe command and announces the next set ofavailable commands.

Say: “Call International” to dial more than 10digits or any special characters.

3. Say the number you wish to call starting withthe area code in single digit format sB . If thesystem has trouble recognizing the correctphone number, try entering the number inthe following groups: 3-digit area code,



3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “fivefive five” as the 1st group, then “one twoone” as the 2nd group, and “three three fivefour” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than10 digits or any special characters, say “In-ternational”. See “How to say numbers” ear-lier in this section, for more information.

4. When you have finished speaking the phonenumber, the system repeats it back and an-nounces the available commands.

5. Say: “Dial” sC . The system acknowledgesthe command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” later in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, press thebutton on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when youhear the ring tone, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” later in this section.

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

Main Menu

“Call” or “Call International”

“Phone Book”

“Memo Pad”

“Setup”

When you press and release the button onthe steering wheel, you can choose from thecommands on the Main Menu. The followingpages describe these commands and the com-mands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone beforespeaking.

You can say “Help” to hear the list of commandscurrently available any time the system is waitingfor a response.

If you want to end an action without completing it,you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time thesystem is waiting for a response. The system willend the VR session. Whenever the VR session iscancelled, a double beep is played to indicateyou have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command,you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any timethe system is waiting for a response.

When you get used to the menus in the system,you can talk ahead by saying more than onecommand at a time. For example, say, “Call fivefive five one two one two” or “Memo pad record.”

Also, when you get used to the system re-sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone bypressing the button on the steering wheel.However, if you press the button when thesystem is waiting for a response from you it willend the VR session.

“Call”

Main Menu

“Call” or “Call International”

Name (speak name) sA


“Redial” sC

“Call Back” sD

Name (speak name) sA

If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, youcan dial a number associated with a name andlocation.



See “Phone book” later in this section to learnhow to store entries.

When prompted by the system, say the name ofthe phone book entry you wish to call. The systemacknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with thename, the system asks you to choose the loca-tion.

Once you have confirmed the name and location,the system begins the call.


When prompted by the system, say the numberyou wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”and “Making a call by entering a phone number”earlier in this section for more details.

“Redial” sC

Use the Redial command to call the last numberthat was dialed within the vehicle.

NOTE:

The system will not redial the last numberdialed by the handset keypad.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to redial” andends the VR session.

“Call back” sD

Use the Call Back command to dial the number ofthe last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.

If a call back number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to call back”andends the VR session.

International

For dialing more than 10 digits or any specialcharacters, please say “international”. When thesystem acknowledges the command, the systemwill prompt you to speak the number.

During a call

During a call there are several command optionsavailable. Press the button on the steeringwheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-mands.

● “Help” — The system announces the avail-able commands.

● “Go back/Correction” — The system an-nounces “Go back,” ends the VR sessionand returns to the call.

● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returnsto the call.

● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Sendcommand to enter numbers, “*” or “#” duringa call. For example, if you were directed todial an extension by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the commandand sends the tones associated with thenumbers. The system then ends the VR ses-sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,Say “pound” for “#”.

● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-mand to transfer the call from the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System to the cellularphone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Calltransferred to privacy mode.” The systemthen ends the VR session.

You can also issue the Transfer Call com-mand again to return to a hands-free callthrough the vehicle.

● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to muteyour voice so the other party cannot hear it.Use the mute command again to unmuteyour voice.



NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phonenetwork connection is lost while the Mutefeature is on, the Mute feature will be resetto “off” for the next call so the other partycan hear your voice.

“Phone book”

NOTE:

Phone book commands are not availablewhen the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phone Book”

“New Entry” sA

“Edit” sB

“Delete” sC

“List Names” sD

The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for eachphone paired with the system. Each name canhave up to 4 locations/phone numbers associ-ated with it.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected withPhone B.

“New entry” sA

Use the New Entry command to store a newname in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name youwould like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”If the name is too long or too short, the systemtells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a namealready stored, the system tells you, then promptsyou for a name again.

Once the system accepts the name and youconfirm it is correct, the system asks for a location(Home, Office, Mobile or Other).

For example, say: “Home.”The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phone number orto transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”See “How to say numbers” earlier in this sectionfor more information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledgesthe command and asks you to initiate the transferfrom the phone handset. The new contact phonenumber will be transferred from the cellularphone via the BluetoothT communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to eachcellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructionson transferring phone numbers from NISSANrecommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers or transferring an entry, choose“Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber. The system then asks if you would like tostore another location for the same name. If youdo not wish to store another location, the systemends the VR session.



“Edit” sB

Use the Edit command to alter an existing phonebook entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phonenumber to an existing entry.

When prompted by the system, say the name ofthe entry you wish to edit.

The system acknowledges the name and asksyou for the location you would like to edit.

Say the name of the location.

The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phone number orto transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.” See “How to say numbers” earlier in this sectionfor more information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory:

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledgesthe command and asks you to initiate the transferfrom the phone handset. The new contact phonenumber will be transferred from the cellularphone via the BluetoothT communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to eachcellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructionson transferring phone numbers from NISSANrecommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber, then announces that the entry has beenstored. The system then ends the VR session.

“Delete” sC

Use the Delete command to erase one entry fromthe phone book, all entries from the phone book,the current redial number or the current call backnumber.

To delete entries from the phone book, say aname or “All entries” when prompted by the sys-tem.

The system acknowledges the command andasks you to confirm the deletion.

To delete the current redial number or call backnumber, say “redial number” or “call back num-ber” when prompted by the system.

If a redial number or a call back number exists, thesystem deletes them without asking for confirma-tion.

If there is no number for the entry you are trying todelete, the system says so and ends the VRsession.

“List names” sD

Use the List Names command to hear all thenames and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries butdoes not include the actual phone numbers.When the playback of the list is complete, thesystem goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any timeby pressing the button on the steeringwheel. The system ends the VR session.

“Memo pad”

Main Menu

“Memo Pad”

“Record” sA

“Play” sB

“Delete” sC

The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voicememos, each up to 20 seconds long.



“Record” sA

The system announces “Recording” and a tonesounds, signaling you to begin.

Speak the information you wish to record clearly.

When you are done, press the orbutton on the steering wheel.

A tone sounds and the system announces“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to endthe VR session.

If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you wishto record over the oldest memo.

“Play” sB

The system plays back all the memos in the orderof newest to oldest. The system ends the VRsession.

If there are no memos recorded, the system an-nounces “No messages to play.” The systemends the VR session.

“Delete” sC

The Delete command erases all memos. Thesystem asks you to confirm this action beforedeleting all memos.

“Setup”

Main Menu

“Setup”

“Pair Phone” sA

“List Phone” sB

“Select Phone” sC

“Change Priority” sD

“Delete Phone” sE

“Select Ringtone” sF

“Bluetooth Off” sG

Use the Setup command to change options as-sociated with the BluetoothT Hands-Free PhoneSystem.

“Pair phone” sA

Use the Pair Phone command to pair a phone tothe BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System.

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performedwhen the vehicle is stationary. If the vehiclestarts moving during the procedure, theprocedure will be cancelled. Also, see“Pairing procedure” earlier in this sectionfor additional information.

Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair asixth phone, the system announces that you mustfirst delete one phone or replace an existingphone.

If you try to pair a phone that has already beenpaired to your vehicle’s system, the system an-nounces the name the phone is already using.The pairing procedure will then be cancelled.

When prompted by the system, choose from thefollowing commands:

● “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing a phone”earlier in this section.

● “Replace phone” — The system announcesthe names of the phones already paired andasks which you would like to replace.

Once you say the name of the phone youwish to replace, the pairing procedure willbegin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” earlier inthis section.

● “List phone” – See the description below.

“List phone” sB

Use the List Phone command to hear the namesof the phones currently paired. If no phones arepaired, the system announces, “No pairedphones to list.” The system then ends the VRsession.



“Select phone” sC

Use the Select Phone command to select aphone of lesser priority when two or more phonespaired with BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem are in the vehicle at the same time.

The system asks you to name the phone andconfirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the selectedphone remains active until the ignition switch isturned OFF or you select a new phone.

“Change priority” sD

Use the Change Priority command to change thepriority level of the active phone.

The priority level determines which phone is ac-tive when more than one paired BluetoothTphone is in the vehicle.

The system states the priority level of the activephone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, 4,5).

If the new priority level is already being used foranother phone, the two phones will swap prioritylevels.

For example, if the current priority levels are:

Priority Level 1 = Phone APriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone C

and you change the priority level of Phone C toLevel 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone CPriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone A

“Delete phone” sE

Use the Delete Phone command to delete aspecific phone or all phones from the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System.

The system announces the names of the phonesalready paired with the system and their prioritylevel. The system then gives you the option todelete a specific phone, all phones or listen to thelist again.

Once you choose to delete a phone or all phones,the system asks you to confirm this action.

NOTE:

When you delete a phone, the associatedphone book for that phone will also bedeleted.

“Select ringtone” sF

Use the Select Ringtone command to select thetone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call isreceived.

The system announces the name of the activephone and asks you to choose from the followingcommands:

● “Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtoneand asks if you would like to select that tone.If you say “No”, the system plays the nextringtone available and continues to cyclethrough the ringtones until you select one orquit.

● “Silent” — The system asks you to confirmyour wish to disable the ringtone.

“Bluetooth off” sG

Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off theBluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System.

When the BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem is off, you will not be able to make or receivecalls using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, youwill not have access to the Phone Book.

You can still use the Memo Pad and accessSetup.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODESpeaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-dialect users to train the system to improve rec-ognition accuracy. By repeating a number ofcommands, the users can create a voice model oftheir own voice that is stored in the system. The



system is capable of storing a different speakeradaptation model for memory A and memory B.

If memory A is available, the system will usememory A to store the model. If memory A is inuse and memory B is available, the system willuse memory B to store the model. If both of thememory locations are in use, the system will askthe user to select which memory location shouldbe overwritten.

Training procedureThe procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quietoutdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-sion in P (Park) (AT and CVT models) or N(Neutral) (MT models).

3. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press the PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the hands-freephone system to enter the speaker adapta-tion mode or press the PHONE/END( ) button to select a different lan-guage.”


For information on selecting a different lan-guage, see “Choosing a language” earlier inthis section.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selectedautomatically. If both memory locations arealready in use, the system will prompt you tooverwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-vided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you areready to begin, press the button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow theinstructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tellyou an adequate number of phrases havebeen recorded.

10. The system will ask you to say your name.Follow the instructions to register yourname.

11. The system will announce that speaker ad-aptation has been completed and the sys-tem is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

● The button is pressed for more than 5seconds in SA mode.

● The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.

● The ignition switch is turned to the OFF orLOCK position.

Training phrases

During the SA mode, the system instructs thetrainer to say the following phrases. (The systemwill prompt you for each phrase.)

● phone book new entry

● dial three oh four two nine

● delete call back number

● setup pair phone

● memo pad play

● eight pause nine three two pause seven

● delete all entries

● call seven two four zero nine

● phone book delete entry

● memo pad record

● dial star two one seven oh

● Yes

● No

● select ring tone



● dial eight five six nine two

● Bluetooth on

● setup change priority

● call three one nine oh two

● nine seven pause pause three oh eight

● Cancel

● call back number

● call star two zero nine five

● delete phone

● dial eight three zero five one

● Home

● four three pause two nine pause zero

● delete redial number

● phone book list names

● call eight oh five four one

● Correction

● setup change ring tone

● dial seven four oh one eight

● setup main menu

● Delete

● dial nine seven two six six

● memo pad delete

● call seven six three oh one

● go back

● call five six two eight zero

● dial six six four three seven



TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEThe system should respond correctly to all voicecommands without difficulty. If problems are en-countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, tryeach solution in turn, starting with number 1, untilthe problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is toonoisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earlier in this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from thephone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed byusing the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” earlier in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.



WARNING

● Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.


CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System. If you have an ap-proved BluetoothT enabled cellular phone, youcan set up the wireless connection between yourcellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.With BluetoothT wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call withyour cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto-matically connected with the in-vehicle phone

WHA1043

BLUETOOTHT HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM(if so equipped)



module when the ignition switch is turned to theON position with the paired cellular phone turnedon and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different BluetoothTcellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.However, you can talk on only one cellular phoneat a time.

NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports thephone commands, so dialing a phone numberusing your voice is possible. For more details, see“NISSAN Voice Recognition System” later in thissection.

Before using the BluetoothT Hands-Free PhoneSystem, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between acellular phone and the in-vehicle phonemodule before using the hands-free phonesystem.

● Some BluetoothT enabled cellular phonesmay not be recognized by the in-vehiclephone module. Please visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-mended phone list and pairing.

● You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive cellular signal; such asin a tunnel, in an underground parkinggarage, near a tall building or in a moun-tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent itfrom being dialed.

● When the radio wave condition is not idealor ambient sound is too loud, it may bedifficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-ing a call.

● Immediately after the ignition switch ispushed to the ON position or the DVD-ROMfor the navigation system is inserted into theplayer, it may be impossible to receive a callfor a short period of time.

● Do not place the cellular phone in an areasurrounded by metal or far away from thein-vehicle phone module to prevent tonequality degradation and wireless connectiondisruption.

● While a cellular phone is connected throughthe BluetoothT wireless connection, the bat-tery power of the cellular phone may dis-charge quicker than usual. The BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System cannot chargecellular phones.

● If the hands-free phone system seems to bemalfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”later in this section. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

● Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise tocome from the audio system speakers. Stor-ing the device in a different location mayreduce or eliminate the noise.

● Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manualregarding the telephone charges, cellularphone antenna and body, etc.

● The signal strength display on the monitorwill not coincide with the signal strengthdisplay of some cellular phones.

REGULATORY INFORMATIONFCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance withFCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only thesupplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,modification, or attachments could damagethe transmitter and may violate FCC regula-tions.

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and



2. this device must accept any interference,including interference that may cause un-desired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two con-ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must accept anyinterference, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-quirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTHt is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.,U.S.A. and licensed toXanavi InformaticsCorporation.

VOICE COMMANDSYou can use voice commands to operate variousBluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System featuresusing the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. Formore details, see “NISSAN Voice RecognitionSystem” later in this section.

PAIRING PROCEDURE

1. Press the SETUP button, then touch the“Phone” key.

2. Scroll to the bottom of the list and touch the“Bluetooth Setup” key.

3. Touch the “Pair Phone” key, then touch oneof the “None (Add New)” keys.

4. When a PIN code appears on the screen,operate the BluetoothT cellular phone toenter the PIN code. The pairing procedure ofthe cellular phone varies according to eachcellular phone manufacturer. See the cellularphone Owner’s Manual for the details.

5. When the pairing is completed, the screenwill return to the BluetoothT setup display.

LHA0747 WHA0788



PHONE DOWNLOAD

Up to 70 phone numbers can be stored in thephonebook.

1. Press the SETUP button, then touch the“Phone” key.

2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.

3. Touch one of the “None (Add New)” keysfrom the name list of the phonebook.

4. Touch the “Bluetooth” key in order to trans-fer a phonebook entry from your cellularphone to your phonebook in your car.

LHA0760 LHA0761 LHA1010



5. Operate the cellular phone to send a per-son’s name and phone number from thememory of the cellular phone. The memorysending procedure from the cellular phonevaries according to each cellular phonemanufacturer. See the cellular phone Own-er’s Manual for more details.

6. If you want to add a voice tag, touch the“Yes” key on the Add a voice tag? screen.For example, if the partner’s name is David,speak “David” while the Store voice tagscreen is on the display. The David voice tagis stored in the phonebook. Voice tag is auseful function for easy dialing supported bythe voice recognition system. For more infor-

mation, see “NISSAN Voice RecognitionSystem” later in this section.

7. When the phonebook download is com-pleted, the screen will return to the name listof the phonebook.

There are different methods to input a phonenumber. Select one of the following options in-stead of the “Bluetooth” key in step 4 above.

Enter Data by Keypad:Input the name and phone number manually.

Downloaded Phonebook:Select an entry from a list of phone numbers youhave already transferred from your phone to yourvehicle.

Outgoing Calls:Store the name and phone number from theoutgoing call list.

Incoming Calls:Store the name and phone number from theincoming call list.

To delete an item, touch the “Delete item” key.

LHA0762 LHA0763 LHA0764



MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow the procedure below.

1. Press the phone button on the steer-ing wheel switches. The phone screen willappear on the display.

2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.

3. Touch one of the downloaded person’s keyfrom the list. Dialing will start.

4. After the call is over, perform one of thefollowing to finish the call.

a. Touch the “Hang Up” key.

b. Press and hold the phone button onthe steering wheel switches.

There are different methods to make a call. Selectone of the following options instead of the“Phonebook” key in step 2 above.

Redial:Dial the previously dialed number again.

Call Logs - Outgoing Calls:Select the name and phone number from theoutgoing call logs.

Call Logs - Incoming Calls:Store the name and phone number from theoutgoing call list.

Downloaded Phonebook:Choose from a list of stored numbers that havebeen transferred from your phonebook to yourvehicle.

Dial Keypad:Input the phone number manually.

RECEIVING A CALLWhen you hear a phone ring, the display willchange to phone mode. To receive a call, followthe two procedures listed below.

a. Touch the “Answer” key on the display.

b. Press the phone button on the steeringwheel switches.

There are some options available when receivinga call. Select one of the following displayed onthe screen.

LHA0765 LHA0766



Answer:Accept an incoming call to talk.

Hold Call:Continue to hold call.

Reject Call:Reject an incoming call.

To finish the call, follow one of the procedureslisted below:

a. Touch the “Reject Call” key on the display.

b. Press and hold the phone button on thesteering wheel switches.

DURING A CALL

There are some options available during a call.Select one of the following displayed on thescreen if necessary:

Hang up:Finish the call.

Handset:Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

Mute:Mute your voice to the person.

Enter Digit :Brings up a keypad, enter digits when needed.For example, entering your PIN number for voice-mail.

Cancel Mute:This will appear after the “Mute” key is touched.Mute will be cancelled.

To adjust the person’s voice to be louder orquieter, press the volume control switch locatedon the steering wheel switches or turn the volumecontrol knob on the instrument panel while talkingon the phone. This adjustment is also available inthe SETUP mode.

LHA0767



PHONE SETTING

To set up the hands-free phone system to yourpreferred settings, press the SETUP button, thentouch the “Phone” key on the display.

Phonebook:See “Phonebook download” earlier in this sec-tion.

Downloaded Phonebook:See the following information for each item.

● Download All:Transfer phonebook entries from your cellu-lar phone to the vehicle’s phonebook. Formore information, see “Phonebook down-load” earlier in this section.

● Delete Downloaded Phonebook:Delete all of the downloaded phonebookentries.

● Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phone-book:Delete a single entry from the downloadedphonebook. Touch the corresponding letterkey, then touch on the name key you wish todelete. Touch the “Yes” key to delete theentry.

Delete Call Logs:Delete all the outgoing or incoming call logs fromthe list.

Phone Ringer Vol:Adjust the ring volume to be quieter “–” or louder“+”.

Phone Incoming Vol:Adjust the phone incoming volume to be quieter“–” or louder “+”.

Use Vehicle Ringtone:If this item is turned on, a specific ringtone that isdifferent from the cellular phone’s will soundwhen receiving a call.

LHA1010 WHA0788



Bluetooth Setup:See the following information for each item.

● Bluetooth Hands-Free:If this item is turned off, the connection be-tween the cellular phone and the in-vehiclephone module will be canceled.

● Paired Phone List:Up to 5 registered cellular phones areshown on the list.

● Pair Phone:See “Pairing Procedure” in this section.

● Priority ChangeIf multiple phones are registered to the sys-tem, you can change the priority of thephones on the shown list.

● Remove Paired Phone:Delete a registered cellular phone from thepaired list.

● Bluetooth Info.:Check information about the device name,vehicle name, device address device PINand connection status.

● Edit Phone Name:If you would like to change the way yourphone’s name is displayed select this key, acharacter input screen will be displayed.

LHA1011 LHA1012



The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allowshands-free operation of the systems equipped onthis vehicle, such as the phone and navigationsystems.

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, pressthe button located on the steering wheel.Then speak the command for the system youwish to activate. The command given is picked upby the microphone, and it is performed when it isproperly recognized. At this time NISSAN VoiceRecognition will provide a voice and message (inthe center display) to inform you of the commandresults.

USING THE SYSTEM

InitializationWhen the ignition switch is in the ON position,NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, whichtakes a few seconds. When completed, the sys-tem is ready to accept voice commands. Ifthe button is pressed before the initializa-tion completes, the display will show the mes-sage: “Phonetic data downloaded. Please wait.”

Giving voice commands


2. The system announces: “Please say a com-mand”

3. After the tone sounds and the face icon ofthe display changes, speak a command. Foradditional information, see “List of voicecommands” later in this section.

4. Voice and message feedback will be pro-vided when the command is accepted.

● If the command is not recognized, the sys-tem announces: “Please say again.” Repeatthe command in a clear voice.

● If you want to cancel the command, pressthe button or press and holdthe button for 2 seconds during feed-back. The system will announce: “Voice in-put is canceled”

● If you want to adjust the volume of the voicefeedback, press the volume control buttons(2 or +) on the steering wheel while beingprovided with the feedback.

Operating tipsTo get the best performance out of NISSANVoice Recognition, observe the following:

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet aspossible. Close the windows to eliminate thesurrounding noises (traffic noises, vibrationsounds, etc.), which may prevent the systemfrom recognizing the voice commands cor-rectly.

● Wait until a tone sounds before speaking acommand. Otherwise, the command will notbe received properly.

● Start speaking a command within 3.5 sec-onds after the tone sounds.

● Speak in a natural voice without pausingbetween words.

LHA0768

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)



SYSTEM FEATURES

NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the fol-lowing systems:

● Navigation (if so equipped) - See the sepa-rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual forthe available voice commands and opera-tion.

● BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone

For additional information on the navigation sys-tem, see the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certainway to speak numbers in voice commands. Referto the following examples.

General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for“0”.

Phone numbers:

Speak phone numbers according to the followingexamples:

● 1-800-662-6200

● say “Dial” or “Phone dial” the system willrespond with “Please say the first group ofnumbers”, then say:

– “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”,

– “one eight hundred six six two six two ohoh”, or

– “one eight zero zero six six two six two ohoh”.

Note 1: For the best voice recognition phonedialing results, say phone numbers as single dig-its.

Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five fivefive six thousand”.

Personal vocabulary (voicetags)NISSAN Voice Recognition provides the functioncalled “voicetags”, which can be associated withthe phone and the navigation system (if soequipped). Using your own voice, 70 voicetagscan be registered in the “Phonebook” (phone)and 20 locations can be registered in the “Ad-dress Book” (navigation system).

For additional information, see “BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System” earlier in this sectionand/or the separate Navigation System Owner’sManual (if so equipped) for the method of “voic-etag” registration.

BLUETOOTHT HANDS-FREEPHONE SYSTEM VOICECOMMANDSDepending on the commands, some differentphrases are available. Optional words are shownin brackets [ ]. A few words, identified with a slash/, indicate the alternate words that you can selectwhen speaking the command. Data items thatyou need to enter, such as phone numbers, areindicated in italics with brackets < >.

How to say commandsExample: “[PHONE] DIAL/CALL <phone num-ber digits> ” stands for the following possiblecommands.

DIAL <1 to 32 phone number digits>

CALL <1 to 32 phone number digits>

PHONE DIAL <1 to 32 phone number digits>

Help commands● “COMMAND LIST”, “VOICE HELP” or

“HELP”Gives spoken information about NISSANVoice Recognition and displays the list ofhelp commands.



Phone commands

● “[PHONE] DIAL <phone number digits> ”or “CALL <phone number digits> ”Dials the phone number given in the com-mand. Speak the phone number in one se-quence. The number is automatically dialed.

● “[PHONE] REDIAL”Redials the phone number last dialed.

● “OUTGOING CALLS”Shows the outgoing call history (1 to 5).

● “INCOMING CALLS”Shows the incoming call history (1 to 5).

● “PHONE SELECT <phone priority number1 to 5> ” or “SELECT/CHOOSE PHONE<phone priority number 1 to 5> ”If multiple phones are registered to the sys-tem, you can change which phone to con-nect to the system (as long as that phone ispresent in the vehicle).

● “PHONEBOOK”Shows the first page of the “phone book” list.

● “PHONEBOOK <voicetag> ”Shows the specified “voicetag” entry in the“phone book” and dials the phone numberregistered in the specified “voicetag” afterpressing the ENTER button on the steeringwheel.

● “ PHONEBOOK [PLAY] DIRECTORY” or“PLAY PHONEBOOK [DIRECTORY]”Dials the phone number registered in thephone book.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICECOMMANDS (if so equipped)For additional information, see the separate Navi-gation System Owner’s Manual for the voicecommands available and operations.

VOICE RECOGNITION SETTINGSPress the SETUP button then touch the “VoiceRecognition” key.

LHA0747



Voice Feedback:

When this item is enabled (indicator is illumi-nated), vocal feedback during voice recognitionsystem is activated. Touch the Voice Feedback“ON” key to disable the vocal feedback duringvoice recognition.

LHA1014



TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEThe system should respond correctly to all voicecommands without difficulty. If problems are en-countered, follow the solutions given in this guidefor the appropriate error.

Where the solutions are listed by number. Tryeach solution in turn, starting with number one,until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message Solution

Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOG-NIZED” or the system fails to interpret thecommand correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid. See Command list in this section.

2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.

3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.NOTE:If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.

4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

The system consistently selects the wrongvoicetag.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by giving the Address Book Directoryor Phone Directory command.

2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.



5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8NISSAN Intelligent key™ battery discharge . . . . . . . . 5-8

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Traction Control System (TCS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . 5-25Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29


WARNING



EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

● Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-ous. It can cause unconsciousness ordeath.

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicleinspected immediately.

● Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

● Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,otherwise exhaust gases could bedrawn into the passenger compart-ment. If you must drive with the trunk lidopen, follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-ton to off and the fan control dial tohigh to circulate the air.

● If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailer throughthe seal on the trunk lid or the body,follow the manufacturer’s recommen-dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-try into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes areentering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Exhaustgases in the three-way catalyst are burned athigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-tem are very hot. Keep people, animalsor flammable materials away from theexhaust system components.

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving


CAUTION

● Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriously re-duce the three-way catalyst’s ability tohelp reduce exhaust pollutants.

● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-able loss of performance or other un-usual operating conditions aredetected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly by a NISSAN dealer.

● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thethree-way catalyst.

● Do not race the engine while warming itup.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to startthe engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold and in-flated to the inflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle’s handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-function exists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Additional information:

● The TPMS does not monitor the tirepressure of the spare tire.

Starting and driving 5-3


● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicleis driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sud-den drop in tire pressure (for example a flattire while driving).

● The low tire pressure warning light does notautomatically turn off when the tire pressureis adjusted. After the tire is inflated to therecommended pressure, the vehicle must bedriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tirepressure warning light. Use a tire pressuregauge to check the tire pressure.

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe heat caused by the vehicle’s operationand the outside temperature. Low outsidetemperature can lower the temperature ofthe air inside the tire which can cause alower tire inflation pressure. This may causethe low tire pressure warning light to illumi-nate. If the warning light illuminates in lowambient temperature, check the tire pres-sure for all four tires.

● The Tire and Loading Information label (alsoreferred to as the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label) is located in thedriver’s door opening.

● You can also check the pressure of all tires(except the spare tire) on the display screen(if so equipped). The order of the tire pres-sure figures displayed on the screen doesnot correspond with the actual order of thetire position. See “Tire pressure information”in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone andvoice recognition systems ” section.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressurewarning light” in the “Instruments and controls”section and “Tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damagethe tires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur and may lead to an acci-dent and could result in serious per-sonal injury. Check the tire pressure forall four tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In caseof emergency” section for changing aflat tire.)



● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute.The light will remain on after 1 minute.Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.


● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. Thismay cause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, and theTPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarilyinterfere with the operation of the TPMS andcause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-minate.

Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radiofrequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies isbeing used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or aDC/AC converter is being used in or near thevehicle.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obeyall traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-neuvers, because these driving practices couldcause you to lose control of your vehicle. As withany vehicle, loss of control could result in acollision with other vehicles or objects orcause the vehicle to roll over, particularly ifthe loss of control causes the vehicle toslide sideways. Be attentive at all times, andavoid driving when tired. Never drive when underthe influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-scription or over-the-counter drugs which maycause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt asoutlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisionsand rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedor improperly belted person is significantlymore likely to be injured or killed than aperson properly wearing a seat belt.



OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side wheelsmay unintentionally leave the road surface. If thisoccurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-ing the procedure below. Please note that thisprocedure is only a general guide. The vehiclemust be driven as appropriate based on the con-ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheelwith both hands and try to hold a straightcourse.

4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel-erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-hicle to follow the road while vehicle speedis reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-hicle back onto the road surface until vehiclespeed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn thesteering wheel until both tires return to theroad surface. When all tires are on the roadsurface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-propriate driving lane.

● If you decide that it is not safe to return thevehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,road or traffic conditions, gradually slow thevehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occurif the tire is punctured or is damaged due tohitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure losscan also be caused by driving on under-inflatedtires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handlingand stability of the vehicle, especially at highwayspeeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-ing the correct air pressure and visually inspectthe tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels andtires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses airpressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintaincontrol of the vehicle by following the procedurebelow. Please note that this procedure is only ageneral guide. The vehicle must be driven asappropriate based on the conditions of the ve-hicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase thechance of losing control of the vehicle ifthere is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.Losing control of the vehicle may cause acollision and result in personal injury.

● The vehicle generally moves or pulls inthe direction of the flat tire.

● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.● Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheelwith both hands and try to hold a straightcourse.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe locationoff the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to graduallystop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers andeither contact a roadside emergency serviceto change the tire or see “Changing a flattire” in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis Owner’s Manual.



DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-duces coordination, delays reaction timeand impairs judgement. Driving afterdrinking alcohol increases the likelihoodof being involved in an accident injuringyourself and others. Additionally, if youare injured in an accident, alcohol canincrease the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,you must choose not to drive under the influenceof alcohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-though the local laws vary on what is consideredto be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and most peopleunderestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! Andthat is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if yourability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignitionswitch while driving the vehicle except inan emergency. (The engine will stop whenthe ignition switch is pushed 3 consecu-tive times in quick succession or the igni-tion switch is pushed and held for morethan 2 seconds.) If the engine stops whilethe vehicle is being driven, this could leadto a crash and serious injury.

When the ignition switch is pushed without de-pressing the brake pedal (CVT) or the clutchpedal (MT), the ignition switch position will illu-minate as follows:

Push center

● once to change to ACC.

● two times to change to ON.

● three times to return to OFF.

The ignition switch will automatically return to theLOCK position when any door is either opened orclosed with the switch in the OFF position.

LSD0237

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH



The ignition switch is equipped with an anti-theftsteering lock device.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignitionswitch position cannot be switched to OFF untilthe shift selector is moved to the P (Park) position(CVT) or N (Neutral) position (MT).

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to-ward the OFF position, proceed as follows:

1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)position (CVT) or N (Neutral) position (MT).

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switchposition will change to the ON position.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFFposition.

The shift selector can be moved from the P(Park) position if the ignition switch is inthe ON position and the brake pedal isdepressed.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/8 of a right or left turnfrom the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, push the igni-tion switch to the LOCK position. To unlockthe steering wheel, push the ignition switchwhile slightly turning the steering wheelright and left.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,the push-button ignition switch cannot beturned from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation aredisplayed on the vehicle information display. See“Vehicle information display” in the “Instrumentsand controls” section.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCHPOSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position):

The ignition switch can only be locked in thisposition.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it ispushed to the ACC position while carrying theIntelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key insertedin the port.

The ignition switch will lock when any door isopened or closed with the ignition switched off.

OFF:

The ignition switch is in the OFF position whenthe engine is turned off using the ignition switch.No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.

ACC (Accessories):

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio, when the engine is not running.

ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn theignition switch to the OFF position after 1 hourunder the following conditions:

● all doors are closed.

● shift selector is in P (PARK).

The battery saver feature will be cancelled if anyof the following occur:

● any door is opened.

● shift selector is moved out of park.

● ignition switch changes position.

ON (Normal operating position):

This position turns on the ignition system andelectrical accessories.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignitionswitch in ACC or ON positions when theengine is not running for an extended pe-riod. This can discharge the battery.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™BATTERY DISCHARGE



If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost dis-charged, the guide light sA of the Intelligent Keyport blinks and the indicator appears on the ve-hicle information display. See “Vehicle informa-tion display” in the “Instruments and controls”section.

In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into theport sB allows you to start the engine. Make surethe Intelligent Key is placed in the correct direc-tion: The front side faces upward and the key ringside faces downward as illustrated.

To remove the Intelligent Key from the port, pushthe ignition switch to the LOCK position and pullthe Intelligent Key out of the port sC .

NOTE:

The Intelligent Key port does not chargethe Intelligent Key battery. If you see thelow battery indicator, replace the battery assoon as possible. See “NISSAN IntelligentKey™ battery replacement” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section.

CAUTION

● Never place anything except the Intelli-gent Key in the Intelligent Key port. Do-ing so may cause damage to theequipment.

● Make sure the Intelligent Key is in thecorrect direction when inserting it tothe Intelligent Key port. The engine maynot start if it is in the wrong direction.

● Remove the Intelligent Key from theIntelligent Key port after the ignitionswitch is pushed to the LOCK position.

WSD0232 WSD0233



● Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid asfrequently as possible, or at least wheneveryou refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

● Lock all doors.

● Position seat and adjust head restraints.

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights whenthe ignition switch is pushed to the ONposition. See “Warning/indicator lights andaudible reminders” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) model:

Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The starter is designed not to operate ifthe shift selector is in any of the drivingpositions.

Manual transmission:

Move the shift selector to N (Neutral). De-press the clutch pedal to the floor.

The starter is designed not to operateunless the clutch pedal is fully de-pressed.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.Depress the brake pedal and the clutchpedal (if so equipped) and push the ignitionswitch to start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push andrelease the ignition switch while depressingthe brake pedal with the ignition switch inany position.

● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-tremely cold weather or when restarting,depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-proximately 1/3 to the floor) and while

holding, crank the engine. Release theaccelerator pedal when the engine starts.

● If the engine is very hard to start becauseit is flooded, depress the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and hold it.Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion to start cranking the engine. After 5 or6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing theignition switch to LOCK. After crankingthe engine, release the accelerator pedal.Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by depressing thebrake pedal and pushing the push-buttonignition switch to start the engine. If theengine starts, but fails to run, repeat theabove procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than15 seconds at a time. If the engine doesnot start, push the ignition switch to theOFF position and wait 10 seconds beforecranking again, otherwise the startercould be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-onds after starting. Do not race the enginewhile warming it up. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first, especially in

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE



cold weather. In cold weather, keep the en-gine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutesbefore shutting it off. Starting and stoppingthe engine over a short period of time maymake the vehicle more difficult to start.

5. To stop the engine, shift the selector to the P(Park) position (CVT) or to N (Neutral) andapply the parking brake (MT) and push theignition switch to the OFF position.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLETRANSMISSION (CVT) (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or manualshift mode. Always depress the brakepedal until shifting is completed. Fail-ure to do so could cause you to losecontrol and have an accident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while the vehicle is moving. This couldcause an accident.

CAUTION

When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by depress-ing the accelerator pedal. The foot brakeshould be used for this purpose.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-trolled to produce maximum power and smoothoperation.

The recommended operating procedures for thistransmission are shown on the following pages.Follow these procedures for maximum vehicleperformance and driving enjoyment.

NOTE:

Engine power may be automatically re-duced to protect the CVT if the enginespeed increases quickly when driving onslippery roads or while being tested onsome dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the shiftselector out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andmove the shift selector lever into a drivinggear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually startthe vehicle in motion.

4. Stop the vehicle completely before shiftingthe shift selector to the P (Park) position.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE



The CVT is designed so the foot brakepedal MUST be depressed before shiftingfrom P (Park) to any drive position whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

The shift selector cannot be moved out of P(Park) and into any of the other gear posi-tions if the ignition switch is pushed to theLOCK or ACC position.

To move the shift selector:

Push the button while depressing the brakepedal

Push the button to shift

Shift without pushing button

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brakepedal and move the shift selector from P (Park) toany of the desired shift positions.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selectorlever is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage.

P (Park):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use theP (Park) or R (Reverse) position only whenthe vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift selector position when thevehicle is parked or when starting the engine.Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.The brake pedal should be depressed tomove the shift selector from N (Neutral) orany drive position to P (Park). Apply theparking brake. When parking on a hill, apply theparking brake first, then shift the shift selector intothe P (Park) position.

LSD0182



R (Reverse):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use theP (Park) or R (Reverse) position only whenthe vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Makesure the vehicle is completely stopped beforeselecting the R (Reverse) position. The brakepedal must be depressed to move the shiftselector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or anydrive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in this position. You mayshift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

Manual shift mode

When the shift selector is shifted from D to themanual shift gate with the vehicle stopped orwhile driving, the transmission enters the manualshift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu-ally.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis-played on the position indicator in the meter.When shifting the shift selector to the manualshift gate, the position indicator displays 1 (first)up to 6 (sixth) depending on vehicle speed.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6

6 (Sixth):

Use this position for all normal forward driving athighway speeds.

5 (Fifth):

Use this position when driving up long slopes, orfor engine braking when driving down longslopes.

4 (Fourth), 3 (Third) and 2 (Second):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhillgrades.

M1 (First):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor driving slowly through deep snow, sand ormud, or for maximum engine braking on steepdownhill grades.

● Remember not to drive at high speeds forextended periods of time in lower than 6range. This reduces fuel economy.

When shifting up:

Move the shift selector to the + (up) side. (Shiftsto higher range.)

When shifting down:

Move the shift selector to the 2 (down) side.(Shifts to lower range.)

LSD0182



● The transmission will automatically down-shift the gears. (For example, if you select the3rd range, the transmission will shift downbetween the 3rd and 1st gears.)

● Moving the shift selector rapidly to the sameside twice will shift the ranges in succession.

When canceling the manual shift mode:

Return the shift selector to the D (Drive) positionto return the transmission to the normal drivingmode.

● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion may not shift to the selected gear.This helps maintain driving perfor-mance and reduces the chance of ve-hicle damage or loss of control.

● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion may shift up automatically to ahigher range than selected if the en-gine speed is too high. When the ve-hicle speed decreases, the transmis-sion automatically shifts down andshifts to 1st gear before the vehiclecomes to a stop.

● CVT operation is limited to automatic drivemode when CVT fluid temperature is ex-tremely low even if manual shift mode isselected. This is not a malfunction. WhenCVT fluid warms up, manual mode can beselected.

● When the CVT fluid temperature is high, theshift range may upshift in lower rpm thanusual. This is not a malfunction.

Shift lock releaseIf the battery charge is low or discharged, theshift selector may not be moved from the P (Park)position even with the brake pedal depressedand the shift selector button pushed.

If the battery is discharged completely, the steer-ing wheel cannot be locked or unlocked. Do notmove the vehicle with the steering wheel locked.It will be necessary to jump start or have yourbattery charged, see “Jump starting” in the “Incase of emergency” section. Contact yourNISSAN dealer or a professional towing service.

LSD0183



To move the shift selector, complete the followingprocedure:

1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion.


3. Remove the shift lock release cover asshown.

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lockrelease slot and push down.

5. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)position while holding down the shift lockrelease.

6. Push the ignition switch to the ON positionto unlock the steering wheel. Now the ve-hicle may be moved to the desired location.

If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the trans-mission as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the selector lever cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) position while the engine isrunning and the brake pedal is depressed,the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-ing stop lights could cause an accidentinjuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift— in D position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-sion down into a lower gear, depending on thevehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protectionmode

This transmission has a high fluid temperatureprotection mode. If the fluid temperature be-comes too high (for example, when climbingsteep grades in high temperature with heavyloads, such as when towing a trailer), enginepower and, under some conditions, vehiclespeed will be decreased automatically to reducethe chance of transmission damage. Vehiclespeed can be controlled with the acceleratorpedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may belimited.

Fail-safeIf the vehicle is driven under extreme con-ditions, such as excessive wheel spinningand subsequent hard braking, the fail-safesystem may be activated. The MIL maycome on to indicate the fail-safe mode isactivated, see “Malfunction indicator light(MIL)” in the “Instrument and controls”sec-

tion. This will occur even if all electricalcircuits are functioning properly. In thiscase, push the ignition switch to the OFFposition and wait for 10 seconds. Thenpush the switch back to the ON position.The vehicle should return to its normal op-erating condition. If it does not return to itsnormal operating condition, have aNISSAN dealer check the transmission andrepair if necessary.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature protec-tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.The reduced speed may be lower thanother traffic, which could increase thechance of a collision. Be especially care-ful when driving. If necessary, pull to theside of the road at a safe place and allowthe transmission to return to normal op-eration, or have it repaired if necessary.



MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

● Do not over-rev the engine when shift-ing to a lower gear. This may cause aloss of control or engine damage.

CAUTION

● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedalwhile driving. This may cause clutchdamage.

● Fully depress the clutch pedal beforeshifting to help prevent transmissiondamage.

● Stop your vehicle completely beforeshifting into R (Reverse).

● When the vehicle is stopped with theengine running (for example, at a stoplight), shift to N (Neutral) and releasethe clutch pedal with the foot brakeapplied.

ShiftingTo change gears, or when upshifting or down-shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift intothe appropriate gear, then release the clutchslowly and smoothly.

To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depressthe clutch pedal before operating the shift selec-tor. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressedbefore the transmission is shifted, a gear noisemay be heard. Transmission damage may occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence accordingto vehicle speed.

To back up, lift up on the shift selector ring s1 andthen move it to the R (Reverse) position afterstopping the vehicle completely.

The shift selector ring s1 returns to its originalposition when the shift selector is moved to the N(Neutral) position.

If it is difficult to move the shift selector into R(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), thenrelease the clutch pedal. Depress the clutchpedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).

Suggested upshift speedsThe following are suggested vehicle speeds forshifting into a higher gear. These suggestionsrelate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.Actual upshift speeds will vary according to roadconditions, the weather and individual drivinghabits.

LSD0180



For normal acceleration in low altitude areas (lessthan 4,000 ft [1219 m]):

For QR25DE:

GEAR CHANGE ACCEL shiftpoint MPH

(km/h)

CRUISE shiftpoint MPH

(km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24) 8 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40) 17 (27)

3rd to 4th 33 (53) 25 (40)

4th to 5th 44 (71) 36 (58)

5th to 6th 51 (82) 51 (82)

For VQ35DE:

GEAR CHANGE ACCEL shiftpoint MPH

(km/h)

CRUISE shiftpoint MPH

(km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (25) 9 (14)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40) 19 (30)

3rd to 4th 31 (50) 26 (42)

4th to 5th 36 (58) 31 (50)

5th to 6th 43 (69) 37 (59)

For quick acceleration in low altitude areas andhigh altitude areas (over 4,000 ft [1219 m]):

For QR25DE:

Gear change MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 8 (13)

2nd to 3rd 17 (27)

3rd to 4th 25 (40)

4th to 5th 36 (58)

5th to 6th 51 (82)

For VQ35DE:

Gear change MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th to 6th 50 (80)

Suggested maximum speed in eachgearDownshift to a lower gear if the engine is notrunning smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,use the highest gear suggested for that speed.Always observe posted speed limits, and driveaccording to the road conditions, which will en-sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the enginewhen shifting to a lower gear as it may causeengine damage or loss of vehicle control.

GEAR QR25DEMPH (km/h)

VQ35DEMPH (km/h)

1st 32 (53) 36 (58)

2nd 59 (95) 58 (93)

3rd 82 (133) 81 (131)

4th — —

5th — —

6th — —



WARNING

● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

● Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

● Do not use the gear shift in place of theparking brake. When parking, be surethe parking brake is fully engaged.

● Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

To engage: Type A, firmly depress the parkingbrake. Type B, pull the lever up sA .

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift selector in the N (Neutral)position.

CVT models:

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion.

3. Type A, firmly depress the parking brakepedal and it will release. Type B, while pullingup on the parking brake lever slightly, pushthe button and lower completely sB .

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

Type ALSD0158

Type BWSD0169

PARKING BRAKE



1. CANCEL switch2. ACCEL/RES switch3. COAST/SET switch4. ON/OFF switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, itcancels automatically. The SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel then blinks towarn the driver.

● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn thecruise control switch off and have the sys-tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

● The SET indicator light may blink when thecruise control switch is turned ON whilepushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, orCANCEL switch. To properly set the cruisecontrol system, use the following proce-dures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions:

● When it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed.

● On winding or hilly roads.

● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

● In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONSThe cruise control allows driving at a speed be-tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push theON·OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light inthe instrument panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle tothe desired speed, push the COAST/SET switchand release it. The SET indicator light in theinstrument panel comes on. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the setspeed.

● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods.

● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel goes out.

● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator lightgoes out.

● Push the ON·OFF switch off. Both theCRUISE indicator light and SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel go out.

LSD0184

CRUISE CONTROL



The cruise control is automatically canceled andthe SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

● you depress the brake or clutch pedal whilepushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COASTswitch. The preset speed is deleted frommemory.

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-mission), or move the shift selector to N(Neutral) (CVT or A/T)).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.When the vehicle attains the speed you de-sire, release the switch.

● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.Each time you do this, the set speed in-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-lease the switch when the vehicle slows tothe desired speed.

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.Each time you do this, the set speed de-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-turns to the last set cruising speed when thevehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and en-sure the future reliability and economy ofyour new vehicle. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in short-ened engine life and reduced engineperformance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow, and do not run theengine over 4,000 rpm.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km). Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE



● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintaincruising speeds with a constant acceleratorposition.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-hicles.

● Use a proper gear range which suits roadconditions. On level roads, shift into highgear as soon as possible.

● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wearand lowers fuel economy.

● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-proper alignment increases tire wear andlowers fuel economy.

● Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.

● When cruising at highway speeds, it is moreeconomical to use the air conditioner andleave the windows closed to reduce drag.

● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-tion” in “Technical and consumer informa-tion” later in this manual.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY



WARNING

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

● Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park) forCVT models or in an appropriate gearfor manual transmission models. Fail-ure to do so could cause the vehicle tomove unexpectedly or roll away and re-sult in an accident. Make sure the shift

lever has been pushed as far forward asit can go and cannot be moved withoutdepressing the foot brake pedal.

● Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.


1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift selector in the R (Reverse)position. When parking on an uphill grade,place the shift lever in 1st gear.

Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) models:

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-tion.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling intotraffic when parked on an incline, it is a goodpractice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: s1

Turn the wheels into the curb and move thevehicle forward until the curb side wheelgently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: s2

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: s3

Turn the wheels toward the side of the roadso the vehicle will move away from the cen-ter of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key.

SSD0488

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS



The power assisted steering uses a hydraulicpump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, youwill still have control of the vehicle. However,much greater steering effort is needed, especiallyin sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned offwhile driving, the power assist for thesteering will not work. Steering will beharder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will stillhave braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using enginevacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop thevehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will berequired to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out thebrake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going down aslope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could result inloss of vehicle control.

WARNING

● While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-erating could cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe brakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

Parking brake break-inBreak-in the parking brake shoes whenever thestopping effect of the parking brake is weakenedor whenever the parking brake shoes and/ordrum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure thebest brake performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle servicemanual and can be performed by a NISSANdealer.

Wet brakesWhen the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result, yourbraking distance will be longer and the vehiclemay pull to one side during braking.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM



To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedal toheat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes returnto normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at highspeeds until the brakes function correctly.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM(ABS)

WARNING

● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is asophisticated device, but it cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from carelessor dangerous driving techniques. It canhelp maintain vehicle control duringbraking on slippery surfaces. Remem-ber that stopping distances on slipperysurfaces will be longer than on normalsurfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-tances may also be longer on rough,gravel or snow covered roads, or if youare using tire chains. Always maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in frontof you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-sible for safety.

● Tire type and condition may also affectbraking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install thespecified size of tires on all fourwheels.

– When installing a spare tire, makesure that it is the proper size and typeas specified on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See “Tire andLoading Information label” in the“Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

– For detailed information, see“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls thebrakes so the wheels do not lock during hardbraking or when braking on slippery surfaces.The system detects the rotation speed at eachwheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-vent each wheel from locking and sliding. Bypreventing each wheel from locking, the systemhelps the driver maintain steering control andhelps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-pery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steerthe vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.

Self-test featureThe ABS includes electronic sensors, electricpumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. Thecomputer has a built-in diagnostic feature thattests the system each time you start the engineand move the vehicle at a low speed in forward orreverse. When the self-test occurs, you may heara “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brakepedal. This is normal and does not indicate amalfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates theABS warning light on the instrument panel. Thebrake system then operates normally, but withoutanti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during theself-test or while driving, have the vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer.



Normal operationThe ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to roadconditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more wheelsare close to locking up, the actuator rapidly ap-plies and releases hydraulic pressure.

This action is similar to pumping the brakes veryquickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brakepedal and hear a noise from under the hood orfeel a vibration from the actuator when it is oper-ating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS isoperating properly. However, the pulsation mayindicate that road conditions are hazardous andextra care is required while driving.

When accelerating on slippery surfaces the tiremay spin or slip. With the vehicle Traction ControlSystem (TCS), sensors detect these movementsand control the braking and engine output to helpimprove vehicle road traction.

● When the TCS is operating, theindicator in the instrument panel blinks.

● If the indicator blinks, the vehiclemay be under slippery conditions. Be sure todrive carefully. See “Slip indicator light” and“Traction Control System (TCS) off indicatorlight” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-tion of this manual.

● If a malfunction occurs in the system,

the and indicator lightscome on in the instrument panel.

As long as these lights are on, the traction controlfunction is canceled. The vehicle will behave likea vehicle without the system.

WARNING

● The Traction Control System is de-signed to help maintain traction withthe road surface but does not preventaccidents due to abrupt steering opera-tion at high speeds or by careless ordangerous driving techniques. Reducevehicle speed and be especially carefulwhen driving and cornering on slipperysurfaces and always drive carefully.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are not stan-dard equipment or are extremely dete-riorated, the Traction Control Systemmay not operate properly and theindicator light may come on.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, bushings andwheels are not standard equipment orare extremely deteriorated, the TractionControl System may not operate prop-erly and the indicator light maycome on.

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)(if so equipped)



● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the Traction Control System may notoperate properly and the indica-tor light may come on. Do not drive onthese types of roads.

● If wheels or tires other than the recom-mended ones are used, the TractionControl System may not operate prop-erly and the indicator light maycome on.

● The Traction Control System is not asubstitute for winter tires or tire chainson a snow covered road.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system usesvarious sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-hicle motion. Under certain driving situations, thesystem will control braking and engine output tohelp keep the vehicle on its steered path.

● When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)system is operating, the SLIP indicator inthe instrument panel blinks:

● If the SLIP indicator blinks, the road condi-tions may be slippery. Be sure to adjust yourspeed and driving to these conditions. See“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In-struments and controls” section.

● Indicator lightIf a malfunction occurs in the system, theSLIP and indicator lights come on inthe instrument panel.As long as these indicator lights are on, thetraction control function is canceled.

If the vehicle is operated with the Vehicle Dy-namic Control system OFF using the VDC OFFswitch, VDC and TCS functions will be turned off.The SLIP indicator will flash if wheel spin isdetected. The ABS will still operate with the VDCsystem off.

When the VDC system is operating, you may feela pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise orvibration from under the hood. This is normal andindicates that the VDC system is working prop-erly.

The computer has a built in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you start theengine and move the vehicle forward or in reverseat a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation inthe brake pedal. This is normal and is not anindication of a malfunction.

WARNING

● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system isdesigned to help improve driving stabil-ity but does not prevent accidents dueto abrupt steering operation at highspeeds or by careless or dangerousdriving techniques. Reduce vehiclespeed and be especially careful whendriving and cornering on slippery sur-faces and always drive carefully.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM (if so equipped)



● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,bushings and wheels are not NISSANapproved for your vehicle or are ex-tremely deteriorated the Vehicle Dy-namic Control system may not operateproperly. This could adversely affect ve-hicle handling performance, and theVDC OFF indicator light may come on.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are not stan-dard equipment or are extremely dete-riorated, the Vehicle Dynamic Controlsystem may not operate properly andthe Vehicle Dynamic Control off indica-tor light may come on.

● If engine related parts such as the muf-fler are not standard equipment or areextremely deteriorated, the “VDC OFF”indicator or SLIP” indicator or both in-dicator lights may illuminate.

● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the Vehicle Dynamic Control systemmay not operate properly and the VDCOFF indicator light may come on. Donot drive on these types of roads.

● When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the Vehicle Dynamic Control offindicator light may illuminate. This isnot a malfunction. Restart the engineafter driving onto a stable surface.

● If wheels or tires other than the recom-mended ones are used, the Vehicle Dy-namic Control system may not operateproperly and the Vehicle Dynamic Con-trol off indicator light may come on.

● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system isnot a substitute for winter tires or tirechains on a snow covered road.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKTo prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomesfrozen, heat the key before inserting it into the keyhole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if soequipped).

ANTI-FREEZEIn the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check theanti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged during extremelycold weather conditions, the battery fluid mayfreeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-mum efficiency, the battery should be checkedregularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING



DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including theengine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed toprovide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate your ve-hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALLSEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Pleaseconsult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability informa-tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibit theiruse. Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For details see“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items becarried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to removeice and snow from the windows and wiperblades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-voir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshifting toofast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.

● Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

● Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patch ofice is seen ahead, brake before reach-ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

● Do not use the cruise control on slip-pery roads.

● Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.



ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not use your engine block heaterwith an ungrounded electrical systemor a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-riously injured by an electrical shock ifyou use an ungrounded connection.

● Disconnect and properly store the en-gine block heater cord before startingthe engine. Damage to the cord couldresult in an electrical shock and cancause serious injury.

● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plugthe extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded110-VAC outlet. Failure to use theproper extension cord or a groundedoutlet can result in a fire or electricalshock and cause serious personalinjury.

Engine block heaters are available throughNISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperaturestarting. The engine block heater should be usedwhen the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) orlower.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine blockheater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into agrounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extensioncord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged infor at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outsidetemperatures, to properly warm the enginecoolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn theengine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-erly store the cord to keep it away frommoving parts.




MEMO

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-12


TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-sure of all tires except the spare. When the lowtire pressure warning light is lit, one or more ofyour tires is significantly under-inflated. If thevehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, theTPMS will activate and warn you of it by the lowtire pressure warning light. This system will acti-vate only when the vehicle is driven at speedsabove 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, referto “Warning/indicator lights and audible remind-ers” in the “Instruments and controls” section,and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”in the “Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damagethe tires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur and may lead to an acci-dent and could result in serious per-sonal injury. Check the tire pressure forall four tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute.The light will remain on after 1 minute.Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.


● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-low:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road andaway from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parkingbrake. Shift the manual transmission into R(Reverse), or the CVT into P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and tosignal professional road assistance person-nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from trafficand clear of the vehicle.

FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency


WARNING

● Make sure the parking brake is securelyapplied and the manual transmission isshifted into R (Reverse), or the CVT isshifted into P (Park).

● Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

● Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.

Blocking wheelsPlace suitable blocks s1 at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tires2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it isjacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and toolsOpen the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting andspare tire cover. Remove the jack s1 and wheelnut wrench s2 from the tool box.

WCE0044 LCE0148

In case of emergency 6-3


Turn the clamp to remove the spare tire. Removethe spare tire.

Removing the bolt-on wheel cover (ifso equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheelcaps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-sult in personal injury.

The wheel covers are held on by the wheel nuts.The wheel cover will be removed along with thewheel when the nuts are removed.

To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod sBas illustrated.

Apply cloth sA between the wheel and jack rod toprevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover orwheel surface.

LCE0149 LCE0183



Jacking up vehicle and removing thedamaged tire

WARNING

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

● Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use thejack provided with your vehicle on othervehicles. The jack is designed for liftingonly your vehicle during a tire change.

● Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle for jacksupport.

● Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

● Never use blocks on or under the jack.

● Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

● Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) offthe ground. It may cause the vehicle tomove.

Jack-up point coupeWCE0147

Jack-up point sedan

WCE0160



Always refer to the proper illustrations for thecorrect placement and jack-up points for yourspecific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached tothe jack body and the following instruc-tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nutsuntil the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.Align the jack head between the two

notches in the front or the rear as shown.Also fit the groove of the jack head betweenthe notches as shown.

The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack leverand rod with both hands. Carefully raise thevehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-move the wheel nuts, and then remove thetire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. See specific instructions under theheading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tightenthe wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly as illustrated untilthey are tight.

LCE0020 WCE0056



4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securelyin the sequence illustrated (sA , sB , sC , sD ,sE ). Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nutsto the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for three hours or more or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the tireand loading information label affixed to thedriver side center pillar.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-ment in the vehicle.

6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floorcarpeting over the damaged tire.

7. Close the trunk.

WARNING

● Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properly se-cured after use. Such items can becomedangerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

● The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. See specific instructions un-der the heading “Wheels and tires” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, theinstructions and precautions below must be fol-lowed.

WARNING

● If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

● Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

● Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-rosive sulfuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● The booster battery must be rated at 12volts. Use of an improperly rated batterycan damage your vehicle.

JUMP STARTING



● Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump starting.

● Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

● Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at anytime. Keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damage tothe charging system and cause personalinjury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,position the two vehicles to bring their bat-teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-lector to N (Neutral) (manual transmission)or to P (Park) (Continuously Variable Trans-mission). Switch off all unnecessary electri-

cal systems (lights, heater, air conditioner,etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-lustrated (sA , sB , sC , sD ).

CAUTION

● Always connect positive (1) to positive(1) and negative (2) to body ground (forexample, strut mounting bolt, enginelift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

WCE0054



● Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the engine com-partment and that the cable clamps donot contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle andlet it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, turn the key off andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-nect the negative cable and then the positivecable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Besure to dispose of the cloth used to coverthe vent holes as it may be contaminatedwith corrosive acid.

CAUTION

● Do not push start this vehicle. Thethree-way catalyst may be damaged.

● Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) models cannot be push-started ortow-started. Attempting to do so maycause transmission damage.

● For manual transmission models, nevertry to start the vehicle by towing it.When the engine starts, the forwardsurge could cause the vehicle to collidewith the tow vehicle.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading), or ifyou feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormalnoise, etc., take the following steps.

WARNING

● Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator cap while theengine is still hot. When the radiatorcap is removed, pressurized hot waterwill spurt out, possibly causing seriousinjury.

● Do not open the hood if steam is com-ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the shift selectorto N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P(Park) (CVT).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).Open all the windows, move the heater or airconditioner temperature control to maximumhot and fan control to high speed.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS



3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radiatorbefore opening the hood. (If steam or cool-ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do notopen the hood further until no steam orcoolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-gine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fan isrunning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leaking,the water pump belt is missing or loose, orthe cooling fan does not run, stop the en-gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts or theengine cooling fan. The engine coolingfan can start at any time.

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tankwith the engine running. Add coolant to theengine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSANdealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial inCanada) and local regulations for towing must befollowed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-tors are generally familiar with the applicable lawsand procedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damage to yourvehicle, NISSAN recommends having a serviceoperator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to havethe service operator carefully read the followingprecautions:

WARNING

● Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

● Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

● When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system andpowertrain are in working condition. Ifany of these conditions apply, dollies ora flatbed tow truck must be used.

● Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE



For information about towing your vehicle behinda recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSANNISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towedwith the driving (front) wheels off the ground orplace the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

ACE0511 SCE0199A



CAUTION

● Never tow Continuously Variable Trans-mission (CVT) models with the frontwheels on the ground or four wheels onthe ground (forward or backward), asthis may cause serious and expensivedamage to the transmission. If it is nec-essary to tow the vehicle with the rearwheels raised always use towing dolliesunder the front wheels.

● When towing Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) models with thefront wheels on towing dollies, or whentowing manual transmission modelswith the front wheels on the ground:

– Turn the ignition key to the OFF po-sition, and secure the steering wheelin a straight-ahead position with arope or similar device. Never securethe steering wheel by turning the ig-nition key to the LOCK position. Thismay damage the steering lockmechanism.

– Move the gearshift lever to the N(Neutral) position.

● When towing Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) or manual trans-mission models with the rear wheels onthe ground (if you do not use towingdollies): Always release the parkingbrake.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuckvehicle)

Pulling a stuck vehicleDo not use the hook (if so equipped) to tow thevehicle.

LCE0138



WARNING

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

CAUTION

● Tow chains or cables must be attachedonly to the main structural members ofthe vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle bodywill be damaged.

● Do not use the vehicle tie downs to freea vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.Never tow the vehicle using the vehicletie downs or recovery hooks.

● Always pull the cable straight out fromthe front or rear of the vehicle. Neverpull the vehicle at an angle.

● Pulling devices should be routed sothey do not touch any part of the sus-pension, steering, brake or coolingsystems.

● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvasstraps are not recommended for use invehicle towing or recovery.

Rocking a stuck vehicleIf your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use the following procedure:

1. Make sure the area in front and behind thevehicle is clear of obstructions.

2. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clearan area around the front tires.

3. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-ward.

● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)and D (Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low)and R (Reverse) (MT models).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possibleto maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R (Reverse) and D(Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low) and R(Reverse) (MT models).

● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55km/h).

4. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a fewtries, contact a professional towing serviceto remove the vehicle.




MEMO

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6


In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain.

● after driving on coastal roads.

● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs geton the paint surface.

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in ashady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the bodycover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty ofwater. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mildsoap, a special vehicle soap or general purposedishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm(never hot) water.

CAUTION

● Do not use car washes that use acid inthe detergent. Some car washes, espe-cially brushless ones, use some acid forcleaning. The acid may react with someplastic vehicle components, causingthem to crack. This could affect theirappearance, and also could cause themnot to function properly. Always checkwith your car wash to confirm that acidis not used.

● Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot, asthe surface may become water-spotted.

● Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areasmust be cleaned regularly. Take care that thedrain holes in the lower edge of the door areopen. Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash awayroad salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle toavoid water spots.

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surface andhelps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing isrecommended to remove built-up wax residueand to avoid a weathered appearance beforere-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing theproper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-ing. Follow the instructions supplied with thewax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,cutting compounds or cleaners that maydamage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishingon a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull thefinish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care


REMOVING SPOTSRemove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,and tree sap as quickly as possible from thesurface of the paint to avoid lasting damage orstaining. Special cleaning products are availableat a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessorystore.

UNDERBODYIn areas where road salt is used in winter, it isnecessary to clean the underbody regularly inorder to prevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-riod and again in the spring, the underseal mustbe checked and, if necessary, retreated. GLASS

When cleaning the rear window, it may be easierto clean if the high-mounted stop light is removedfirst.

Be careful when removing the high-mountedstop light to reduce the risk of damaging thehigh-mounted stop light wires.

To remove the high-mounted stop light:

s1 Push toward rear of vehicle.

s2 Lift to remove.

The high-mounted stop light must be properlyreinstalled before driving your vehicle.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust filmfrom the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass tobecome coated with a film after the vehicle isparked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a softcloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electri-cal conductors, radio antenna elements orrear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-ened in a mild soap solution, especially duringwinter months in areas where road salt is used. Ifnot removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoidstaining or discoloring the wheels:

● Do not use a cleaner that uses strongacid or alkali contents to clean thewheels.

WAI0005

Appearance and care 7-3


● Do not apply wheel cleaners to thewheels when they are hot. The wheeltemperature should be the same as am-bient temperature.

● Rinse the wheel to completely removethe cleaner within 15 minutes after thecleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tiredressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating tothe tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it mayreact with the coating and form a compound. Thiscompound may come off the tire while driving andstain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take thefollowing precautions:

● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-ing on the tire dissolves more easily thanwith an oil-based tire dressing.

● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to helpprevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to re-move).

● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a drytowel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interiortrim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuumcleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl andleather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with adry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order tomaintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-tectors contain chemicals that may stain orbleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to cleanthe meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hotsteam cleaners) on the seat. This candamage the seat or occupant classifica-tion sensor. This can also affect the opera-tion of the air bag system and result inserious personal injury.

CLEANING INTERIOR



CAUTION

● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-lar material.

● Small dirt particles can be abrasive anddamaging to leather surfaces andshould be removed promptly. Do notuse saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-gents or ammonia-based cleaners asthey may damage the leather’s naturalfinish.

● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-age the lens cover.

FLOOR MATSThe use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make iteasier to clean the interior. No matter whatmats are used, be sure they are fitted foryour vehicle and are properly positioned inthe footwell to prevent interference withpedal operation. Mats should be maintainedwith regular cleaning and replaced if they be-come excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s sideonly)This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket toact as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floormats have been specially designed for your ve-hicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has agrommet hole incorporated in it. Position the matby placing the floor mat bracket hook through thefloor mat grommet hole while centering the mat inthe footwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats areproperly positioned.

SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.Allow the belts to dry completely in the shadebefore using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts,since these materials may severelyweaken the seat belt webbing.WAI0006

Appearance and care 7-5


MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirtand debris in body panel sections, cavities,and other areas.

● Damage to paint and other protective coat-ings caused by gravel and stone chips orminor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.Wet floor coverings will not dry completely insidethe vehicle and should be removed for drying toavoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of highrelative humidity, especially those areas wherethe temperatures stay above freezing and whereatmospheric pollution exists and road salt isused.

TemperatureHigh temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollutionIndustrial pollution, the presence of salt in the airin coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paintand repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doorsopen to avoid water accumulation.

● Check the underbody for accumulation ofsand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with wateras soon as possible.

CAUTION

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-bris from the passenger compartmentby washing it out with a hose. Removedirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

● Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-sion, which may be required in some areas, con-sult a NISSAN dealer.

CORROSION PROTECTION



8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . 8-13Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17

Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Brake pad wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Front park/turn/sidemarker light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43


Your new NISSAN has been designed to haveminimum maintenance requirements with longservice intervals to save you both time andmoney. However, some day-to-day and regularmaintenance is essential to maintain your NIS-SAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as itsemission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure thatthe scheduled maintenance, as well as generalmaintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one whocan ensure that your vehicle receives propermaintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optionalscheduled maintenance items are described andlisted in your “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide”. You must refer to that guide to ensurethat necessary maintenance is performed on yourNISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items whichshould be checked during normal day-to-day op-eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-eration. It is your responsibility to perform thesemaintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requiresminimal mechanical skill and only a few generalautomotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSANdealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicleappears to malfunction, have the systemschecked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialistswho are kept up-to-date with the latest serviceinformation through technical bulletins, servicetips, and in-dealership training programs. Theyare completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-hicles before they work on your vehicle, ratherthan after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’sservice department performs the best job to meetthe maintenance requirements on your vehicle —in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section. Ifyou detect any unusual sounds, vibrations orsmells, be sure to check for the cause or have aNISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, youshould notify a NISSAN dealer if you think thatrepairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “ * ” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doorsand engine hood operate properly. Also ensurethat all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.Make sure that the secondary latch keeps thehood from opening when the primary latch isreleased.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself


When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are alloperating properly and installed securely. Alsocheck headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checkingthe tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten ifnecessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge oftenand always prior to long distance trips. If neces-sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including thespare, to the pressure specified. Check carefullyfor damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)transmitter components Replace the TPMStransmitter grommet seal, valve core and capwhen the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicleshould pull to either side while driving on astraight and level road, or if you detect uneven orabnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

● For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regularbasis. Check the windshield at least every sixmonths for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-aged windshield repaired by a qualified repairfacility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks orwear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as when per-forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-hicle, etc.

Additional information on the followingitems with an “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure the pedal does not bindor require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat awayfrom the pedal.

Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or thevehicle seems to take longer to stop, see aNISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mataway from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull thevehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)P (Park) position mechanism On a fairlysteep hill, check that the vehicle is held securelywith the shift selector in the P (Park) positionwithout applying any brakes.

Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely heldon a fairly steep hill with only the parking brakeapplied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,see a NISSAN dealer.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure theyoperate smoothly and all latches lock securely inevery position. Check that the head restraintsmove up and down smoothly and the locks (if soequipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat beltsystem (for example, buckles, anchors, adjustersand retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3


and are installed securely. Check the belt web-bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hardsteering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properly and thatthe wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properly and insufficient quantity when operating the heater orair conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (for example, each time youcheck the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-hicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure thatthe brake and clutch fluid level is between theMIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant levelwhen the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive beltsare not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parkingthe vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drainback into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loosesupports, cracks or holes. If the sound of theexhaust seems unusual or there is a smell ofexhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaustsystem inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See thecarbon monoxide warning in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. Water dripping from theair conditioner after use is normal. If you shouldnotice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,check for the cause and have it corrected imme-diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Checkthe level when the fluid is cold, with the engineoff. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure thehoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or looseconnections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-posed to corrosive substances such as thoseused on icy roads or to control dust. It is veryimportant to remove these substances from theunderbody, otherwise rust may form on the floorpan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At theend of winter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, in those areaswhere mud and dirt may have accumulated. Seethe “Appearance and care” section of thismanual.

Windshield washer fluid* Check that there isadequate fluid in the reservoir.



When performing any inspection or maintenancework on your vehicle, always take care to preventserious accidental injury to yourself or damage tothe vehicle. The following are general precau-tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the vehiclefrom moving. For manual transmissionmodels, move the shift lever to N (Neu-tral). For CVT models, move the selectorlever to P (Park).

● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

● If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans, beltsand any other moving parts.

● It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

● Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

● If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, supportit with safety stands.

● Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

● On gasoline engine models, the fuelfilter or fuel lines should be serviced bya NISSAN dealer because the fuel linesare under high pressure even when theengine is off.

CAUTION

● Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

● Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

● Never leave the engine or the CVT re-lated component harness connectordisconnected while the ignition switchis in the ON position.

● Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic engine cooling fan. It may comeon at any time without warning, even ifthe ignition key is in the OFF positionand the engine is not running. To avoidinjury, always disconnect the negativebattery cable before working near thefan.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectiongives instructions regarding only those itemswhich are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-der information” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improperservicing may result in operating difficulties orexcessive emissions, and could affect warrantycoverage. If in doubt about any servicing,have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS



QR25DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reser-

voir (M/T model)4. Air cleaner5. Fuse block6. Battery7. Fuse/Fusible link box8. Engine oil dipstick9. Radiator cap10. Drive belt location11. Engine coolant reservoir12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

LDI0553

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS



VQ35DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reser-

voir (M/T model)4. Air cleaner5. Fuse block6. Battery7. Fuse/Fusible link box8. Engine oil dipstick9. Radiator cap10. Drive belt location11. Engine coolant reservoir12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

LDI0552



The engine cooling system is filled at the factorywith Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti-freeze andcoolant protection. The anti-freeze solution con-tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional en-gine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

● Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator. See precautions in “If yourvehicle overheats” found in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manual.

● The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a genuineNISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sureto use only a Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalentwith the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized or distilledwater. The use of other types of coolantsolutions or coolant colors, such as or-ange, may damage the engine coolingsystem.

Outside temperaturedown to

GenuineNISSANLong Life

Antifreeze/Coolant orequivalent

Demineral-ized or dis-tilled water

°C °F

-34 -29.2 50% 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVELCheck the coolant level in the reservoir whenthe engine is cold. If the coolant level is belowthe MIN level sB , add coolant to the MAX levelsA . If the reservoir is empty, check the coolantlevel in the radiator when the engine is cold. Ifthere is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill theradiator with coolant up to the filler opening andalso add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level sA .

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked by a NISSANdealer.

LDI0554

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM



CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTA NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.The service procedure can be found in theNISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when the en-gine is hot.

● Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escapingfrom the radiator.

● Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-insert it all the way.

QR25DE engineLDI0555

VQ35DE engineLDI0556

ENGINE OIL



5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oillevel. It should be between the H (High) andL (Low) marks sB . This is the normal oper-ating oil level range. If the oil level is belowthe L (Low) mark sA , remove the oil filler capand pour recommended oil through theopening. Do not overfill sC .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the severityof operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-erating the engine with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, andsuch damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler sA cap by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plugsB .

WDI0214QR25DE

WDI0492



5. Remove the drain plug sB with a wrench byturning it counterclockwise and completelydrain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove andreplace it at this time. See “Changing engineoil filter” later in this section.

● Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

● Check your local regulations.

WARNING

● Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a newwasher. Securely tighten the drain plug witha wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil throughthe oil filler opening, then install the oil fillercap securely.

See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual for drainand refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on theoil temperature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Always usethe dipstick to determine when the properamount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage aroundthe drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.Add engine oil if necessary.

VQ35DEWDI0493



CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.


3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter sA .

4. Loosen the oil filter sA with an oil filterwrench by turning it counterclockwise. Thenremove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface witha clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket materialremaining on the sealing surface of theengine. Failure to do so could lead toengine damage.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with cleanengine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistanceis felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

QR25DEWDI0494

VQ35DEWDI0495



CAUTION

● Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT FluidNS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.

● Using transmission fluid other thanGenuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 willdamage the CVT, which is not coveredby the NISSAN new vehicle limitedwarranty.

When checking or replacement is required, werecommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

The fluid level should be checked using the HOTMAX range on the power steering fluid reservoirat fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on thepower steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genu-ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAXdepending on system fluid temperature. Removethe cap and fill through the opening.

CAUTION

● DO NOT OVERFILL.

● Recommended fluid is GenuineNISSAN PSF or equivalent.

LDI0557

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLETRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

POWER STEERING FLUID



For further brake and clutch fluid specificationinformation, refer to “Capacities and recom-mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminatedfluid may damage the brake and clutchsystems. The use of improper fluids candamage the brake and clutch systemand affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.

● Clean the filler cap before removing.

● Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous andshould be stored carefully in markedcontainers out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surfacewith water.

BRAKE FLUIDCheck the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If thefluid level is below the MIN line or the brakewarning light comes on, add DOT 3 brake fluid upto the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently,the system should be checked by a NISSANdealer.

CLUTCH FLUIDCheck the clutch fluid level in the reservoir(manual transmissions only). If the fluid level isbelow the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN SuperHeavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluidup to the MAX line. If fluid must be added fre-quently, the system should be checked by aNISSAN dealer.

For further brake and clutch fluid specificationinformation, refer to “Capacities and recom-mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of this manual.

LDI0558 LDI0558

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID



WINDOW WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIR

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.Add window washer fluid when the low windowwasher fluid warning light comes on (if soequipped).

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift thecap off the reservoir tank and pour the windowwasher fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for bettercleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when drivingconditions require an increased amount of win-dow washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

● Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for window washer solution.This may result in damage to the paint.

● Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concen-trate and water.

● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.Clean the battery with a solution of bakingsoda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days orlonger, disconnect the negative (-) batteryterminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

● Do not expose the battery to flames orelectrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener-ated by the battery is explosive. Do notallow battery fluid to contact your skin,eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Aftertouching a battery or battery cap, do nottouch or rub your eyes. Thoroughlywash your hands. If the acid contactsyour eyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 minutesand seek medical attention.

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

LDI0559

WINDOW WASHER FLUID BATTERY



● When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriveras shown. Use a cloth to protect the batterycase.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only distilledwater to bring the level up to the bottom ofthe filler opening. Do not overfill.

WDI0224

LDI0302



Vehicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”in the “In case of emergency” section of thismanual. If the engine does not start by jumpstarting, the battery may have to be replaced.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

1. Power steering fluid pump2. Water pump3. Generator4. Air conditioner5. Crank pulley6. Automatic belt tensioner

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position before servicing drive belt.The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusualwear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt isin poor condition or is loose, have it replacedor adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-tion and tension in accordance with themaintenance schedule found in the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

QR25DE engineWDI0673

DRIVE BELT



1. Power steering fluid pump2. Generator3. Air conditioner4. Crank pulley

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Iridium-tipped spark plugs (if soequipped)

It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped sAspark plugs as frequently as conventional typespark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSANService and Maintenance Guide”. Do not serviceiridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-ping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engagedsecurely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrect socketcan damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, see your NISSANdealer for assistance.

VQ35DE engineLDI0564 SDI1895

SPARK PLUGS



The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned andreused. Replace it according to the maintenancelog shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-nance Guide.” When replacing the filter, wipe theinside of the air cleaner filter housing and thecover with a damp cloth.

To remove the air cleaner filter, push the tabs andpull the unit upward.

WARNING

● Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you or oth-ers to be burned. The air cleaner notonly cleans the air, it stops the flame ifthe engine backfires. If it isn’t there, andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the air cleanerremoved, and be careful when workingon the engine with the air cleanerremoved.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could resultin serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTERThe in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-borne dust and pollen particles and reducessome objectionable outside odors. The filter islocated behind the glove box. Refer to the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” forchange intervals.

If replacement is required, see your NISSANdealer.

Type ALDI0562

Type BLDI0563

AIR CLEANER



CLEANINGIf your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may be onthe blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washersolution or a mild detergent. Your windshield isclean if beads do not form when rinsing with clearwater.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soakedin a washer solution or a mild detergent. Thenrinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-shield is still not clear after cleaning the bladesand using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-age the windshield and impair drivervision.

REPLACINGReplace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

s2 Push the release tab, then move the wiperblade down the wiper arm to remove.

s3 Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiperarm until it clicks into place.

5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in thegroove.

6. Return the wiper to its original position andrelease it until it has made contact with thewindshield. Do not Throw the wiper bladeaway.

CAUTION

● After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.

● Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass; otherwise the arms may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

WDI0594

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES



If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful notto let wax get into the washer nozzle sA . This maycause clogging or improper windshield washeroperation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove itwith a needle or small pin sB .

If the brakes do not operate properly, have thebrakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjustevery time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake systemcheck if the brake pedal height does notreturn to normal.

BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audiblewear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is inmotion. The noise will be heard whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise maybe heard. Occasional brake noise during light tomoderate stops is normal and does not affect thefunction or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For more information regardingbrake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

WDI0570

BRAKES



Two types of fuses are used. Type sA is used inthe fuse boxes in the engine compartment. TypesB is used in the passenger compartment fusebox.

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. Theyare stored in the passenger compartment fusebox.

Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-partment and passenger compartment fuseboxes.

If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,the type A fuse will not be level with the fusepocket as shown in the illustration. This will notaffect the performance of the fuse. Make sure thefuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in theunderhood fuse boxes.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

LDI0455 LDI0457 LDI0560

FUSES



3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing thetab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. Thefuse puller is located in the center of the fuseblock in the passenger compartment.

5. If the fuse is open sA , replace it with a newfuse sB .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

Fusible linksIf the electrical equipment does not operate andfuses are in good condition, check the fusiblelinks. If any of these fusible links are melted,replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.

WDI0452



PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open sA , replace it with anequivalent good fuse sB .

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

WDI0402Type A

WDI0452



CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallowthe battery or removed parts.

Type BLDI0456

WDI0567

BATTERY REPLACEMENT



NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-lows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-gent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver sA into the slit sBof the corner and twist it to separate theupper part from the lower part. Use a cloth toprotect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2032 or equiva-lent.

● Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-tric terminals as doing so could cause amalfunction.

● Hold the battery by the edges. Holdingthe battery across the contact points willseriously deplete the storage capacity.

● Make sure that the + side faces the bot-tom of the case.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated sC sD .

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance forreplacement.

FCC Notice:Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device.

WDI0568



HEADLIGHTSReplacing the xenon headlight bulb (ifso equipped)

WARNING

cHIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they pro-duce a high voltage. To prevent an electricshock, never attempt to modify or disas-semble. Always have your xenon head-lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. Foradditional information, see “Headlightand turn signal switch” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section.

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type whichuses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-cause the headlight assembly must be removedfrom the vehicle for bulb replacement, see yourNISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment isnecessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

● Do not leave the headlight assemblyopen without a bulb installed for a longperiod of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,etc. entering the headlight body mayaffect bulb performance. Remove thebulb from the headlight assembly justbefore a replacement bulb is installed.

● Only touch the base when handling thebulb. Never touch the glass envelope.Touching the glass could significantlyaffect bulb life and/or headlightperformance.

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● Use the same number and wattage asshown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of theexterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. Atemperature difference between the inside andthe outside of the lens causes the fog. This is nota malfunction. If large drops of water collectinside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

FRONT PARK/TURN/SIDEMARKERLIGHTBulb replacement requires the removal of theheadlight assembly. If replacement is required,see your NISSAN dealer.

LIGHTS



EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*1

Headlight assembly *2

Low (Halogen) 55 H11Low (Xenon) 35 D2RHigh 65 H9Park 27 168Turn 8 3457NAK

SidemarkerSedan 5 168Coupe 5 W5W

Front fog light (if so equipped) *2 55 H11Step light — 194Rear combination light

Tail/Stop 8/27 3157KTurn 27 3156

Backup (reversing)Sedan 18 921Coupe 13 912

License plate light *2 5 W5WHigh-mounted stop light *2

Inside (coupe) — LEDInside (sedan) 18 921Spoiler (if so equipped) — LED

Map light 8 B5YInterior light 8 B5YTrunk light 3.4 158Glove box light *2 3.4 658

*1 Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

*2 See a NISSAN dealer for assistance.



Coupe

1. Mirror-mounted turn signal light(if so equipped)

2. Interior light3. Map light4. Headlamp assembly5. Fog light (if so equipped)6. Step light7. High-mount stoplight8. Trunk light9. License plate light10. Rear combination light

WDI0626



Sedan

1. Rear map light2. Front map light3. Step light4. Headlamp assembly5. Fog light (if so equipped)6. High-mount stoplight (if so equipped)7. Trunk light8. Spoiler mounted stoplight

(if so equipped)9. Rear combination light10. License plate light11. Mirror-mounted turn signal light

(if so equipped)

WDI0680



Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D. Whenreplacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lampand/or cover.

Indicates bulb removalIndicates bulb installation

Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing.

WDI0306

Step lightLDI0341

Map lightLDI0571



Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing.Dome light

WDI0632



Rear combination light

To access the bulbs in the rear combination light:

s1 Remove the fasteners. Carefully push backthe carpet.

s2 Remove the 2 nuts and pull out the rearcombination light.

s3 Rotate the bulb(s) counterclockwise andpull out to remove:

sA Turn signal light

sB Sidemarker light

sC Tail/stop light

sD Backup light

WDI0635



If you have a flat tire, see the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Itmonitors tire pressure of all tires exceptthe spare. When the low tire pressurewarning light is lit, one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-sure warning light” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section, “Tire Pressure Monitor-ing System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “Incase of emergency” section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including thespare) often and always prior to long dis-tance trips. The recommended tire pres-sure specifications are shown on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification labelor the Tire and Loading Information labelunder the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.The Tire and Loading Information label isaffixed to the driver side center pillar. Tirepressures should be checked regularlybecause:

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

● Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other objectsor if the vehicle strikes a curb whileparking.

The tire pressures should be checkedwhen the tires are cold. The tires areconsidered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours, or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderatespeeds.

Trunk lightWDI0343

WHEELS AND TIRES



Incorrect tire pressure, including un-der inflation, may adversely affecttire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

● Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-tion label. The vehicle weight ca-pacity is indicated on the Tire andLoading Information label (if soequipped). Do not load your ve-hicle beyond this capacity. Over-loading your vehicle may result inreduced tire life, unsafe operat-ing conditions due to prematuretire failure, or unfavorable han-dling characteristics and couldalso lead to a serious accident.Loading beyond the specified ca-pacity may also result in failure ofother vehicle components.

● Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you heavily load yourvehicle, use a tire pressure gaugeto ensure that the tire pressuresare at the specified level.

● For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.



Tire and loading information label

s1 Seating capacity: The maximum num-ber of occupants that can be seatedin the vehicle.

s2 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-mation in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section.

s3 Original tire size: The size of the tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle atthe factory.

s4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires tothis pressure when the tires are cold.Tires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 or morehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km) at moderate speeds. The recom-mended cold tire inflation is set by themanufacturer to provide the best bal-ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,driveability, tire noise, etc., up to thevehicle’s GVWR.

s5 Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” laterin this section.

s6 Spare tire size (if so equipped).

LDI0549



Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from thetire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not press toohard or force the valve stem side-ways, or air will escape. If the hissingsound of air escaping from the tire isheard while checking the pressure,reposition the gauge to eliminate thisleakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare to the specifica-tion shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the core ofthe valve stem briefly with the tip ofthe gauge stem to release pressure.Recheck the pressure and add orrelease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,including the spare.

LDI0393



Size Cold Tire Inflation Pres-sure

Front Original Tire P215/60/R16 220 kPa, 32 PSIP215/55R17 230 kPa, 33 PSIP235/45R18

Rear Original Tire P215/60R16 220 kPa, 32 PSIP215/55R17 230 kPa, 33 PSIP235/45R18

Spare Tire T135/70R16T135/90R16 420 kPa, 60 PSI

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers toplace standardized information on thesidewall of all tires. This information iden-tifies and describes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and also pro-vides the tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire in case of arecall.

ExampleWDI0394



s1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles (not alltires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-ber gives the width in millimeters ofthe tire from sidewall edge to side-wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,known as the aspect ratio, gives thetire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This numberis the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): Thisnumber is the tire’s load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should notdrive the vehicle faster than the tirespeed rating.

ExampleWDI0395



s2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for anew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-ment Of Transportation” The symbolcan be placed above, below or to theleft or right of Tire Identification Num-ber.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’sidentification mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code(Optional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-ture

6. Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. For ex-ample, the numbers 3103 means the31st week of 2003. If these numbersare missing, then look on the othersidewall of the tire.

s3 Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-ers also must indicate the materials in thetire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,and others.

s4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-sure

This number is the greatest amount of airpressure that should be put in the tire. Donot exceed the maximum permissible in-flation pressure.

s5 Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum loadin kilograms and pounds that can be car-ried by the tire. When replacing the tireson the vehicle, always use a tire that hasthe same load rating as the factory in-stalled tire.

s6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

ExampleWDI0396



s7 The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire hasradial structure.

s8 Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that aredefined throughout this section, IntendedOutboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall thatcontains a whitewall, bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on theother sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-ward facing sidewall of an asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that mustalways face outward when mounted on avehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

● When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with information abouttire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

● Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equippedtires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-els to provide good performance all year, includ-ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Seasontires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&Son the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than All Season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some modelsto provide superior performance on dry roads.Summer tire performance is substantially re-duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not havethe tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, NISSAN recommends the use ofSNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all fourwheels.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and load rating to theoriginal equipment tires. If you do not, it canadversely affect the safety and handling of yourvehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratingsthan factory equipped tires and may not matchthe potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the samesize, brand, construction and tread pattern on allfour wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tiresmay be used. However, some U.S. states andCanadian provinces prohibit their use. Checklocal, state and provincial laws before installing



studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities ofstudded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Only certain SAE class “S” tire chains canbe used on this vehicle. Using the wrongClass “S” chains on this vehicle will causedamage to the vehicle. If you plan to usetire chains/cables, you should use a tirechain that meets the minimum clearancesfor your vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according tolocation. Check the local laws before installingtire chains. When installing tire chains, make surethey are the proper size for the tires on yourvehicle and are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use a tire chain thatis designed to provide the specified space sAbetween the installed tire chain s1 and where thetire meets the rim s2 as shown on the chart.

Wheel size Minimum space required

16 in .7 in (17 mm)

17 in .2 in (4 mm)

18 in .2 in (4 mm)

A tire chain that provides the specified amount ofspace will provide the necessary clearance be-tween the tire and the closest vehicle suspensionor body component. The minimum clearances aredetermined using the factory-equipped tires.Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chaintensioners when recommended by the tire chainmanufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end linksof the tire chain must be secured or removed toprevent the possibility of whipping action dam-age to the fenders or underbody. If possible,avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tirechains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed.Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/orvehicle handling and performance may be ad-versely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on thefront wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving withtire chains in such conditions can cause damageto the various mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress.

LDI0574



CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tiresevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual for tire re-placing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-ened to specifications at all times. Itis recommended that wheel nuts betightened to specification at eachtire rotation interval.

WARNING

● After rotating the tires, check andadjust the tire pressure.

● Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

● Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


1. Wear indicator2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

● Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking, bulg-ing or objects caught in the tread.If excessive wear, cracks, bulgingor deep cuts are found, the tire(s)should be replaced.

WDI0258 WDI0259



● The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When thewear indicators are visible, thetire(s) should be replaced.

● Tires degrade with age and use.Have tires, including the spare,over 6 years old checked by aqualified technician becausesome tire damage may not be ob-vious. Replace the tires as neces-sary to prevent tire failure andpossible personal injury.

● Improper service of the spare tiremay result in serious personal in-jury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tire, contact a NISSANdealer.


Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, treaddesign, speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. Recommended types andsizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

WARNING

● The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of tires ofdifferent brands, construction (bias,bias-belted or radial), or tread patternscan adversely affect the ride, braking,handling, VDC system, ground clear-ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chainclearance, speedometer calibration,headlight aim and bumper height.Some of these effects may lead to acci-dents and could result in serious per-sonal injury.

● If your vehicle was originally equippedwith 4 tires that were the same size andyou are only replacing 2 of the 4 tiresnstall the new tires on the rear axle.Placing new tires on the front axle maycause loss of vehicle control in somedriving conditions and cause an acci-dent and personal injury.

● If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheels whichhave the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set couldcause premature tire wear, degrade ve-hicle handling characteristics, affectthe VDC system and/or interferencewith the brake discs/drums. Such inter-ference can lead to decreased brakingefficiency and/or early brake pad/shoewear. Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information”section of this manual for wheel off-setdimensions.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute.The light will remain on after 1 minute.Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.




● Do not install a damaged or deformedwheel or tire even if it has been re-paired. Such wheels or tires could havestructural damage and could fail with-out warning.

● The use of retread tires is notrecommended.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handlingand tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can getout of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet.

Care of wheels

● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicleto maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels when thewheel is changed or the underside of thevehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washingthe wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in areaswhere it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged orinvolved in an accident:

WARNING

● The spare tire should be used for emer-gency use only. It should be replacedwith the standard tire at the first oppor-tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-tial damage.

● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoidsharp turns and abrupt braking whiledriving.

● Periodically check spare tire inflationpressure. Always keep the pressure ofthe TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tireat 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY sparetire installed do not drive the vehicle atspeeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire should be used on therear wheels and the original tire usedon the front wheels (drive wheels). Usetire chains only on the front (original)tires.



● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire will wear at a faster ratethan the standard tire. Replace thespare tire as soon as the tread wearindicators appear.

● Do not use the spare tire on othervehicles.

● Do not use more than one spare tire atthe same time.

● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chainswill not fit properly and may cause dam-age to the vehicle.

● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire is smaller than the originaltire, ground clearance is reduced. Toavoid damage to the vehicle, do notdrive over obstacles. Also, do not drivethe vehicle through an automatic carwash since it may get caught.



9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification number(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-26Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-27

In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28


The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and LubricantsUS measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 75.6 See “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.Engine oil *6

Drain and RefillWith oil filterchange

QR25DE 4-7/8 qt 4 qt 4.6• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1• Viscosity SAE 5W-30 *1

VQ35DE 4-7/8 qt 4 qt 4.6Without oil filterchange

QR25DE 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.3VQ35DE 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.3

Cooling systemWith reservoir

QR25DE 2 gal 1-5/8 gal 7.6 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent50% Demineralized or distilled waterVQ35DE 2-1/8 gal 1-3/4 gal 8.2

Manual transmission gear oil — — — Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscos-ity SAE 75W-85

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 *2Power steering fluid (PSF) — — — Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*3Brake and clutch fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *4 or equivalent DOT 3Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a) *5Air conditioning system oil — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *5Windshield washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or equivalent*1: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”*2: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT transmission, which is not

covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.*3: DEXRON™ VI type ATF can be used.*4: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.*5: For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations.”*6: For further details, see “Engine Oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information


FUEL RECOMMENDATION

For 2.5L engine

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

For 3.5L engine

NISSAN recommends the use of premium un-leaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Researchoctane number 96). If unleaded premium gaso-line is not available, you may use unleaded regulargasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKInumber (Research octane number 91), but youmay notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meetsthe World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-cations where it is available. Many of the automo-bile manufacturers developed this specificationto improve emission control system and vehicleperformance. Ask your service station manager ifthe gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasolineSome fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-lated gasolines. These gasolines are speciallydesigned to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSANsupports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-gests that you use reformulated gasoline whenavailable.

Gasoline containing oxygenatesSome fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanolwith or without advertising their presence.NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels ofwhich the oxygenate content and the fuel com-

patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-termined. If in doubt, ask your service stationmanager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please takethe following precautions as the usage of suchfuels may cause vehicle performance problemsand/or fuel system damage.

● The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend other thanmethanol blend is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

● If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system damageand/or vehicle performance problems.At this time, sufficient data is not avail-able to ensure that all methanol blendsare suitable for use in NISSAN ve-hicles.

Technical and consumer information 9-3


If any driveability problems such as engine stall-ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced afterusing oxygenate-blend fuels, immediatelychange to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with alow blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuelethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 canonly be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Donot use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. governmentregulations require fuel ethanol dispensingpumps to be identified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common abbreviation orthe appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of anyaftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve depositremovers, etc.) which are sold commercially.Many of these additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active solvents orsimilar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended can causepersistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Sparkknock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. If youdetect a persistent heavy spark knock evenwhen using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knockwhile holding a steady speed on levelroads, have a NISSAN dealer correct thecondition. Failure to correct the conditionis misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSANis not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in sparkknock, after-run and/or overheating, which maycause excessive fuel consumption or enginedamage. If any of the above symptoms are en-countered, have your vehicle checked at aNISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is not acause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.

CAUTION

● Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehiclenot specifically designed for E-85 fuelcan damage fuel system componentsand is not covered by the NISSAN newvehicle limited warranty.

● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%fuel ethanol and 15% unleadedgasoline.

● U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-fied by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbrevia-tion or the appropriate percentage forthat region.



ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, qualityand viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactoryengine life and performance. See “Capacitiesand recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in thissection. NISSAN recommends the use of anenergy conserving oil in order to improve fueleconomy.

Select only engine oils that meet the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-tion mark on the front of the container. Oils whichdo not have the specified quality label should notbe used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-sary when the proper oil type is used and main-tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has beenpreviously used should not be used.

Oil viscosityThe engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is importantto select the engine oil viscosity based on thetemperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oilviscosity other than that recommended couldcause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described in “Changeintervals”.

Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filtersthat are not of the specified quality, or exceedingrecommended oil and filter change intervalscould reduce engine life. Damage to the enginecaused by improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-ranty.

WTI0183



Your engine was filled with a high-quality engineoil when it was built. You do not have to changethe oil before the first recommended changeinterval. Oil and filter change intervals dependupon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes:

● repeated short distance driving at cold out-side temperatures

● driving in dusty conditions

● extensive idling

● towing a trailer

● stop and go commuting

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND OILRECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle must be charged with the refriger-ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSANA/C system oil Type S or the exact equiva-lents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil willcause severe damage to the air condition-ing system and will require the replace-ment of all air conditioner systemcomponents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozonelayer. Although this refrigerant does not affect theearth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-tions require the recovery and recycling of anyrefrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trainedtechnicians and equipment needed to recoverand recycle your air conditioner system refriger-ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your airconditioner system.



ENGINE

Model QR25DE VQ35DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder in-line 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)

Displacement cu in (cm3) 151.82 (2,488) 213.45 (3,498)

Firing order 1–3–4–2 1–2–3–4–5–6

Idle speed

M/T

CVT (in “N” position) No adjustment is necessary.

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idlespeed)

CO % at idle

Spark plug DILKAR6A-11 FXE22HR-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS



WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type Size Offset in (mm)

Aluminum/Steel 16 x 7JJ 1.77 (45)

Aluminum 17 x 7 1/2JJ 1.77 (45)

Aluminum 18 x 7.5JJ 1.77 (45)

T type (Spare) 16 x 4T 1.77 (45)

Tire size P215/60R16

P215/55R17

P235/45R18

Spare tire T135/70R16

T135/90R16

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Coupe Sedan

Overall length in (mm) 182.5 (4,636) 189.8 (4,820)Overall width in (mm) 70.7 (1,795) 70.7 (1,795)Overall height in (mm) 55.3 (1,405) 57.9 (1,471)Front track in (mm) 61.0 (1,549) 61.0 (1,549)Rear track in (mm) 60.8 (1,544) 61.0 (1,549)Wheelbase in (mm) 105.3 (2,675) 109.3 (2,776)

Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg)See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on the center pillar between the driver’s side frontand rear doors.

Gross axle weight ratingFront lb (kg)Rear lb (kg)



When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should first findout if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too lowmay cause engine damage. All gasoline vehiclesmust be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas whereappropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modify thevehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-sion control and safety standards vary accordingto the country, state, province or district; there-fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, transpor-tation, and registration are the responsibil-ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsiblefor any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe vehicle identification number (VIN) plate isattached as shown. This number is the identifica-tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicleregistration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)The vehicle identification number is located asshown.

LTI0025 WTI0037

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGYOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHERCOUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION



ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.CERTIFICATION LABELThe Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-able vehicle information, such as: Gross VehicleWeight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Reviewit carefully.

QR25DEWTI0096

VQ35DEWTI0049 LTI0197



EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label is at-tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABELThe cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. The label is located asshown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABELThe air conditioner specification label is affixed tothe underside of the hood as shown.

WTI0173 WTI0174 WTI0178



Use the following steps to mount the front licenseplate:

s1 Make a shallow hole in each plastic finisherat the location mark (small dimple) using a0.31 in (8 mm) drill. To avoid damaging thethreads behind the finisher, apply only lightpressure to the drill.

s2 Mount the license plate bracket using two 8mm slotted hex head screws.

WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside a vehicle. Ina collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself withthe following terms before loading yourvehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of yourvehicle) - vehicle weight including:standard and optional equipment, flu-ids, emergency tools, and spare tireassembly. This weight does not in-clude passengers and cargo.

WTI0179

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION



● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weight ofpassengers and cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) - maximum total combinedweight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch, trailertongue load and any other optionalequipment. This information is lo-cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limit specifiedfor the front or rear axle. This informa-tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

● GCWR (Gross Combined Weightrating) - The maximum total weightrating of the vehicle, passengers,cargo, and trailer.

● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum totalweight limit specified of the load(passengers and cargo) for the ve-hicle. This is the maximum combinedweight of occupants and cargo thatcan be loaded into the vehicle. If thevehicle is used to tow a trailer, thetrailer tongue weight must be in-cluded as part of the cargo load. Thisinformation is located on the Tire andLoading Information label (if soequipped).

● Cargo capacity - permissible weightof cargo, the subtracted weight ofoccupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-hicle shown as “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo” on the Tire andLoading Information label. Do not exceedthe number of occupants shown as“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-pants and cargo”, add the weight of alloccupants, then add the total luggageweight. Examples are shown in the follow-ing illustration.



Steps for determining correct loadlimit

1. Locate the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXXlbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if theXXX amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =300 kg.)

ExampleLTI0152



5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.See “Measurement of Weights” later inthis section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label.

LOADING TIPS

● The GVW must not exceed GVWRor GAWR as specified on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● Do not load the front and rear axle tothe GAWR. Doing so will exceed theGVWR.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

● Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rear GAWRs.If you do, parts of your vehiclecan break, tire damage could oc-cur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could resultin loss of control and cause per-sonal injury.

● Overloading not only can shortenthe life of your vehicle and thetire, but can also cause unsafevehicle handling and longer brak-ing distances. This may cause apremature tire failure whichcould result in a serious accidentand personal injury. Failurescaused by overloading are notcovered by the vehicle’swarranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weightshifts that could affect the balance of yourvehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, driveto a scale and weigh the front and the rearwheels separately to determine axleloads. Individual axle loads should not ex-ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loadsshould not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the vehicle certification label. Ifweight ratings are exceeded, move or re-move items to bring all weights below theratings.



WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of atrailer and its cargo can adversely affectvehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy loadfor the first 500 miles (800 km). Yourengine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and otherparts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-marily to carry passengers and cargo. Rememberthat towing a trailer places additional loads onyour vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is availableon the website at www.nissanusa.com. Thisguide includes information on trailer towing ca-pability and the special equipment required forproper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITSMaximum trailer loadsNever allow the total trailer load to exceed thevalue specified in the “Towing Load/Specification” chart found later in this section.The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus itscargo weight.

● When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem must be used.

The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle(including passengers and cargo) plus the totaltrailer load. Towing loads greater than these orusing improper towing equipment could ad-versely affect vehicle handling, braking and per-formance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is notonly related to the maximum trailer loads, but alsothe places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-priate for level highway driving may have to bereduced for low traction situations (for example,on slippery boat ramps).

LTI0164

TOWING A TRAILER



Temperature conditions can also affect towing.For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outsidetemperatures on graded roads can affect engineperformance and cause overheating. The engineprotection mode, which helps reduce the chanceof engine damage, could activate and automati-cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed maydecrease under high load. Plan your trip carefullyto account for trailer and vehicle load, weatherand road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced enginepower and vehicle speed. The reducedspeed may be lower than other traffic,which could increase the chance of a col-lision. Be especially careful when driving.If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-ing speed, pull to the side of the road in asafe area. Allow the engine to cool andreturn to normal operation. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from impropertowing procedures is not covered byNISSAN warranties.

Tongue loadKeep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent ofthe total trailer load or use the trailer tongue loadspecified by the trailer manufacturer. The tongueload must be within the maximum tongue loadlimits shown in the following “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load becomesexcessive, rearrange cargo to allow for propertongue load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceedthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel. The GVW equals the combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optionalequipment. In addition, front or rear GAW mustnot exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

WTI0160 TI1012M



Towing capacities are calculated assuming abase vehicle with driver and any options requiredto achieve the rating. Additional passengers,cargo and/or optional equipment, such as thetrailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle andreduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacityand trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed toconfirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, FrontGAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measuredusing platform type scales commonly found attruck stops, highway weigh stations, buildingsupply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity fortongue load, use the following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all ofthe passengers and cargo that are normallyin the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from theGVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-able maximum tongue load.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weighyour trailer on a scale with all equipment andcargo, that are normally in the trailer when it istowed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is notmore than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shownon the trailer and is not more than the calculatedavailable maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale tomake sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and RearGross Axle Weight are not more than FrontGross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weighton the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need tobe moved or removed to meet the specified rat-ings.

Example:

● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighedon a scale - including passengers, cargo andhitch - 4,103 lb. (1861 kg).

● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) fromF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -4,203 lb. (1906 kg).

● Maximum Towing Load from “Towing Load/Specification9 chart - 1,000 lb. (454 kg).

4,203 lb. (1906 kg) GVWR

– 4,103 lb. (1861 kg) GVW

= 100 lb. (45 kg) Available for tongueweight

1,000 lb. (454 kg) Capacity available fortowing

100 lb. (45 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 1,000 lb. (454 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less thanthe maximum towing capacity due to the passen-ger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within thetrailer tongue load specification recommendedby the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue loadbecomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed themaximum tongue weight specification shown inthe “Towing load/specification” chart even if thecalculated available tongue weight is greaterthan 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is lessthan 10% , reduce the total trailer weight tomatch the available tongue weight.



Always verify that available capacities are withinthe required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION

UNIT: lb (kg)

MAXIMUM TOWINGLOAD

1,000 (454)

MAXIMUM TONGUELOAD

100 (45)

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available fromyour NISSAN dealer (Canada only). Make surethe trailer hitch is securely attached to the ve-hicle, to help avoid personal injury or propertydamage due to sway caused by crosswinds,rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specificweight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-pable of towing a trailer heavier than theweight rating of the hitch components.Never exceed the weight rating of thehitch components. Doing so can causeserious personal injury or propertydamage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weightrating for your trailer:

● The required hitch ball size is stamped onmost trailer couplers. Most hitch balls alsohave the size printed on the top of the ball.

● Choose the proper class hitch ball based onthe trailer weight.

● The diameter of the threaded shank of thehitch ball must be matched to the ball mounthole diameter. The hitch ball shank shouldbe no more than 1/16” smaller than the holein the ball mount.

● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must belong enough to be properly secured to theball mount. There should be at least 2threads showing beyond the lock washerand nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount andthe ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.Choose a proper class ball mount based on thetrailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount shouldbe chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with theground.

Sway control deviceSudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffetingcaused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-dling. Sway control devices may be used to helpcontrol these affects. If you choose to use one,contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to makesure the sway control device will work with thevehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-tem. Follow the instructions provided by themanufacturer for installing and using the swaycontrol device.

Class I hitchClass I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).



You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment thathas a 2,000 lb (909 kg) maximum weight rating tothe vehicle, but your vehicle is only capable oftowing the maximum trailer weights shown in theTowing Load/Specification Chart earlier in thissection.

CAUTION

● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

● The hitch should not be attached to oraffect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-tem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

● To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck fromthe rear, where practical, remove thereceiver when not in use.

● After the hitch is removed, seal the boltholes to prevent exhaust fumes, wateror dust from entering the passengercompartment.

● Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-hicle tires to the recommended coldtire pressure indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

● Trailer tire condition, size, load ratingand proper inflation pressure shouldbe in accordance with the trailer andtire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between yourvehicle and the trailer. The safety chains shouldbe crossed and should be attached to the hitch,not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leaveenough slack in the chains to permit turningcorners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used toprovide power for all trailer lighting. Thisunit uses the vehicle battery as a directpower source for all trailer lights whileusing the vehicle tail light, stoplight andturn signal circuits as a signal source. Themodule/converter must draw no morethat 15 milliamps from the stop and taillamp circuits. Using a module/converterthat exceeds these power requirementsmay damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-tain the proper equipment and to have itinstalled.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/orlocal regulations. For assistance in hooking uptrailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-table trailer dealer.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or localregulations and that it is properly installed.



WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-rectly to the vehicle brake system.

When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem MUST be used. However, moststates require a separate braking systemon trailers with a loaded weight above aspecific amount. Make sure the trailermeets the local regulations and the regu-lations where you plan to tow.

Several types of braking systems areavailable.

Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuatoris mounted on the trailer tongue with ahydraulic line running to each trailerwheel. Surge brakes are activated by thetrailer pushing against the hitch ball whenthe tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surgebrakes are common on rental trailers andsome boat trailers. In this type of system,there is no hydraulic or electric connec-tion for brake operation between the towvehicle and the trailer.

Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric brakingsystems are activated by an electronic sig-nal sent from a trailer brake controller(special brake-sensing module). If electrictrailer brakes are used, see (Electric trailerbrake controller( in this section.

Have a professional supplier of towingequipment make sure the trailer brakesare properly installed and demonstrateproper brake function testing.

Pre-towing tips

● Be certain your vehicle maintains a levelposition when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if ithas an abnormal nose-up or nose-downcondition; check for improper tongue load,overload, worn suspension or other possiblecauses of either condition.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Keep the cargo load as low as possible inthe trailer to keep the trailer center of gravitylow.

● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of thetrailer load is in the front half and 40% is inthe back half. Also make sure the load isbalanced side to side.

● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, andtrailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach atrailer to the vehicle.

● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform toall federal, state or local regulations. If not,install any mirrors required for towing beforedriving the vehicle.

● Determine the overall height of the vehicleand trailer so the required clearance isknown.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of thevehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,stopping and backing up in an area which is freefrom traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-mance will be somewhat different than undernormal driving conditions.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin orlock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-ently becoming unlatched.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.



● Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of thesteering wheel with one hand. Move yourhand in the direction in which you want thetrailer to go. Make small corrections andback up slowly. If possible, have someoneguide you when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle andtrailer when parking. Parking on a slope is notrecommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector lever to the P(Park) position before blocking thewheels and applying the parking brake,transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhillside of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowlyrelease the brake pedal until the blocks ab-sorb the vehicle load.


5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.


3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer areclear from the blocks.


7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

● While going downhill, the weight of thetrailer pushing on the tow vehicle may dete-riorate overall handling characteristics.Therefore, to maintain adequate control, re-duce your speed and shift to a lower gear.Avoid long or repeated use of the brakeswhen descending a hill, as this reduces theireffectiveness and could cause overheating.Shifting to a lower gear instead provides“engine braking” and reduces the need tobrake as frequently.

● If the engine coolant temperature rises to ahigh temperature, refer to “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “In case of emergency”section of this owner’s manual.

● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalcircumstances.

● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first500 miles (805 km).

● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you dotow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● Have your vehicle serviced more often thanat intervals specified in the recommendedMaintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

● When making a turn, your trailer wheels willbe closer to the inside of the turn than yourvehicle wheels. To compensate for this,make a larger than normal turning radiusduring the turn.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adverselyaffect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-ing vehicle sway. When being passed bylarger vehicles, be prepared for possiblechanges in crosswinds that could affect ve-hicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal toallow the vehicle to coast and steer asstraight ahead as the road conditions allow.This combination will help stabilize the ve-hicle

– Do not correct trailer sway by steering orapplying the brakes.



2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply thebrakes and pull to the side of the road in asafe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-anced as described earlier in this section.

● Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requires con-siderably more distance than normal pass-ing. Remember, the length of the trailer mustalso pass the other vehicle before you cansafely change lanes.

● Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans-mission to a lower gear for engine brakingwhen driving down steep or long hills. Thiswill help slow the vehicle without applyingthe brakes.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too longor too frequently. This could cause thebrakes to overheat, resulting in reducedbraking efficiency.

● Increase your following distance to allow forgreater stopping distances while towing atrailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

● NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-trol not be used while towing a trailer.

● Some states or provinces have specificregulations and speed limits for vehicles thatare towing trailers. Obey the local speedlimits.

● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

● When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe orrear bumper.

● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lightsbefore backing the trailer into the water orthe trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmission oil/fluid should be changed more frequently.For additional information, see the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section earlierin this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground is sometimes called flat towing. Thismethod is sometimes used when towing a vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle, such as a motorhome.

CAUTION

● Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmission damage.

● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

● DO NOT tow any continuously variabletransmission vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground (flat towing). Do-ing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis-sion parts due to lack of transmissionlubrication.

● For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing recommended by NISSAN”in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

Continuously Variable TransmissionTo tow a vehicle equipped with a continuouslyvariable transmission, an appropriate vehicle dollyMUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s drivewheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’srecommendations when using their product.



Manual Transmission● Always tow with the manual transmission in

Neutral.

● After towing 500 miles (805 km), start andidle the engine with the transmission in Neu-tral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engineafter every 500 miles (805 km) of towingmay cause damage to internal transmissionparts.

DOT (Department of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) timesas well on the government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of thetire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance which all passenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING



WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-ther separately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the followingemission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with othervehicle warranties in your Warranty InformationBooklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.If you did not receive a Warranty InformationBooklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-ment by writing to:

● Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-mation Booklet which comes with your NISSANvehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-placement by writing to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting ourConsumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at1-800-NISSAN-1.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (USonly)



Due to legal requirements in some states andCanadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when itis driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,the ready condition can be obtained by ordinaryusage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired orthe battery is disconnected, the vehicle may bereset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking theI/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Turn theignition switch ON without starting the engine. Ifthe Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes onsteady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10seconds , the I/M test condition is “not ready”. Ifthe MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/Mtest condition is “ready”. If the MIL indicates thevehicle is in a “not ready” condition, drive thevehicle through the following pattern to set thevehicle to the ready condition. If you cannot or donot want to perform the driving pattern, aNISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe andprudent manner according to traffic con-ditions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine when the engine coolanttemperature gauge needle points to C. Al-low the engine to idle until the gauge needlepoints between the C and H (normal oper-ating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h), then quickly release the acceleratorpedal completely and keep it released for atleast 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for amoment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-utes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission se-lector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)position.


10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.

If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat thepreceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-able between steps. Do not stop the engine untilstep 7 is completed.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST



This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting aroad obstacle, data that will assist in understand-ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDRis designed to record data related to vehicledynamics and safety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in thisvehicle is designed to record such data as:

● How various systems in your vehicle wereoperating;

● Whether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastened;

● How far (if at all) the driver was depressingthe accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

● How fast the vehicle was traveling.

● Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand-ing of the circumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded byyour vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situationoccurs; no data are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and no personal data(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDR data with

the type of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-ment is required and access to the vehicle or theEDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have the special equip-ment, can read the information if they have ac-cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will onlybe accessed with the consent of the vehicleowner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-mitted by law.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information for yourvehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrationsand step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-cedures, this manual is the same one used by thefactory-trained technicians working at NISSANdealerships. Also available are genuine NISSANOwner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Serviceand Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 modelyear and later contact:

1-800-450-9491www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 modelyear and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model yearand prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

1-800-247-5321

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION



For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contactyour nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your areacall the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service andOwner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISIONUnfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikelyevent, there is some important information youshould know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorizethe use of non-genuine collision parts in order tocut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of genuine NISSANcollision parts!If you want your vehicle to be restored using partsmade to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-tions – if you want to help it to last and hold itsresale value, the solution is simple. Tell yourinsurance agent and your repair shop toonly use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damagecaused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protectyour personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-tection and maintain the resale value of yourvehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, usingGenuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-necessary excess wear and tear expenses at theend of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones tominimize the risk that the hood will penetrate thewindshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide suchbuilt-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?In over 40 states, the law says you must beadvised if non-genuine parts are used to repairyour vehicle. And some states have enacted lawsthat restrict insurance companies from authoriz-ing the use of non-genuine collision parts duringthe new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-tect you, so you can take action to protect your-self.

It’s your right!If you should need further information visit us at:www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) orwww.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).



10 Index

A

Active Head Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impactair bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . .1-57, 2-14Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-13Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-20Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11Air conditioner system refrigerant andoil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-18Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-20

Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14Alarm system (See vehicle securitysystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-11Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-24Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21

Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . .4-34, 4-40Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . .4-29

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27FM/AM/SAT radio with compactdisc (CD) changer . . . . . . . . . .4-32, 4-38Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Automatic

Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-45Transmission selector lever lockrelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-29AUX jack. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30, 4-36, 4-42

B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Block heater

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29BluetoothT hands-free phonesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-61Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-24Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-28Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-16, 8-21

Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-18Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . . . .4-7Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-10Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28

C

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43CD changer (See audio system) . . . .4-34, 4-40CD player (See audio system) . . . . . . . . .4-29Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-25Child restraints . . . . . . . . . .1-16, 1-21, 1-23

Precautions on childrestraints. . . . . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-31, 1-37Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-26

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . .7-2Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-28, 4-32, 4-38

(models with navigation system) . . . . . .4-5(models without navigationsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28, 4-32

Z REVIEW COPY—2009 Altima (alt)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)07/01/08—tbrooks X

Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-28, 4-32Clutch

Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-29Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . .5-11

Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Driving with Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

Control panel buttonsBrightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . .4-7Setup button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3With navigation system . . . . . . . . . . .4-2

ControlsHeater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-18

CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-9Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-8Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40

D

Daytime running light system(Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-32Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-2Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Driving with Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11Driving with manual transmission . . . . .5-16Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-11Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-25Engine

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-10Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-12Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-8Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . .2-12Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Engine specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

English/metric setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . .5-2Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38

F

Flashers (See hazard warning flasherswitch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15

F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

10-2


Front air bag system (See supplementalrestraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Fuel

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-25Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. . . . . .3-25Fuel-filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23

G

Garage door opener, HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43

H

Hands-free phone system,BluetoothT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-61Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-33Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11

Active Head Restraint . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . .2-29Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Heater

Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-18Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-12, 4-19

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver . . . . . . .2-51Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

I

Ignition SwitchPush-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . .5-7

Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26, 3-3Important vehicle information label. . . . . . .9-10In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights andaudible reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . .3-29Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . .2-32Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-8, 2-2

Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-32Intelligent Key system

Key operating range . . . . . . . . . .3-8, 3-18Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Remote keyless entry operation. . .3-12, 3-18Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . .3-16, 3-22Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . .3-16, 3-22

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Interior trunk lid release. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7

K

Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . .8-25Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system(See Intelligent Key system). . . . .3-12, 3-18

Keys, For Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . .3-2

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10Emission control information label . . . . .9-11Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10Tire and Loading Information label. . . . .9-11

10-3


Vehicle identification number (VIN)plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-57

Language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . .9-12Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-57, 2-14Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-28Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . .2-10Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-29Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-29Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-23Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-51Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-50Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

LightsMap lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

LockChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. . . . . .3-25Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41

Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . .3-23Vehicle speed sensing door lockmechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-23Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . .2-12Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . .2-23Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12

M

MaintenanceGeneral maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5Outside the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-21Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . .1-2Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-32Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . .3-29Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

N

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . .2-26, 3-3

NISSAN voice recognition system. . . . . . .4-70

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .9-4Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3Oil

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-12Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-9Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5

Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-9Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . .9-27Owner’s manual/service manual orderinformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

P

ParkingParking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-18Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Phone, BluetoothT hands-freesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-61Power

Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

10-4


Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45

PrecautionsMaintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5Precautions on childrestraints. . . . . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-31, 1-37Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-13Precautions on supplementalrestraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-45Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . .4-34, 4-40FM-AM radio with compact disc(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27FM/AM/SAT radio with compactdisc (CD) changer . . . . . . . . . .4-32, 4-38

Readiness for inspection maintenance(I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8Recorders

Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . .9-6Registering your vehicle in another country. . .9-9Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . .9-25

S

SafetyChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6Child seat belts . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-31, 1-37Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-25

Seat adjustmentFront manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4Rear seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9

Seat beltChild safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Infants and small children . . . . . . . . .1-16Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-16Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-13Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-21Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-20Three-point type with retractor. . . . . . .1-17

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Seatback pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Seats

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9

Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Security system (NISSAN vehicleimmobilizer system), engine start. . . . .2-26, 3-3Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20Setup button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Shifting

Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-20Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-50SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57Starting

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-10Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Steering

Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-57, 2-14Supplemental front impact air bag system . .1-50Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels. . . . . . .1-57Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42

Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system). . . . . . . . .1-42

10-5

Z REVIEW COPY—2009 Altima (alt)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)07/01/08—tbrooks X

SwitchAutolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-45Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-33Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-29Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-29Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Rear window and outside mirrordefroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Traction control system (TCS) offswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) offswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-27

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26, 3-3Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 8-45Tire and Loading Information label. . . . .9-11Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . .9-24

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

Tire pressureLow tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . .5-3Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-25Towing

Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . .9-19Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16

Traction control system (TCS) off switch . . .2-35Transceiver

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver . . . . .2-51Transmission

Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13Driving with Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11Driving with manual transmission . . . . .5-16Selector lever lock release . . . . . . . . .5-14

Travel (See registering your vehicle inanother country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3Troubleshooting guide (NISSAN voicerecognition system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-74Trunk access through the rear seat . . . . . . .1-9Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

U

Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . .9-24

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Vehicle

Speed sensing door lock mechanism. . . .3-5Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .9-8Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . .2-35Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . .5-26Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN)(Chassis number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9Vehicle loading information. . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicleimmobilizer system), engine start. . . . .2-26, 3-3Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Voice recognition system. . . . . . . . . . . .4-70

W

WarningAir bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-57, 2-14Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-11Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-11Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . .2-12Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-33Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-23Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-23Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-51Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

10-6


Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . .2-25Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-57Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Washer switch

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-27Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-8Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8When traveling or registering your vehiclein another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Windows

Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-45Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-27Wiper

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-27Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

10-7


RECOMMENDED FUEL:

For 2.5L engine

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

For 3.5L engine

NISSAN recommends the use of premium un-leaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Researchoctane number 96). If unleaded premium gaso-line is not available, you may use unleaded regu-lar gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87AKI number (Research octane number 91), butyou may notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technicaland consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:● Engine oil with API Certification Mark

● Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:See Tire and Loading Information label.

The label is typically located on the driver sidecenter pillar or on the driver’s door. For additionalinformation, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicleuse, follow the recommendations outlined in the“BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” information found inthe “Starting and driving” section of this manual.Follow these recommendations for the future re-liability and economy of your new vehicle. Failureto follow these recommendations may result invehicle damage or shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION


2009 Nissan Altima

Documents

Transcript of 2009 Nissan Altima